to the manual or product owner. Updated manuals, if applicable, can be obtained by contacting the nearest. Johnson Controls Service office ...
WATER-COOLED LIQUID CHILLERS HERMETIC SCROLL
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE
Supersedes 150.27-NM1 (1115)
Form 150.27-NM1 (1119)
035-22148-101
YCRL0064 - 0198 REMOTE CONDENSER SCROLL LIQUID CHILLERS
STYLE A (60 HZ) 50 - 170 TONS
175 KW THROUGH 597 KW
R-410A
Issue Date: November 1, 2019
Products are produced at a facility whose qualitymanagement systems are ISO9001 certified.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
IMPORTANT!
READ BEFORE PROCEEDING!
GENERAL SAFETY GUIDELINES
This equipment is a relatively complicated apparatus. During rigging, installation, operation, maintenance, or service, individuals may be exposed to certain components or conditions including, but not limited to: heavy objects, refrigerants, materials under pressure, rotating components, and both high and low voltage. Each of these items has the potential, if misused or handled improperly, to cause bodily injury or death. It is the obligation and responsibility of rigging, installation, and operating/service personnel to identify and recognize these inherent hazards, protect themselves, and proceed safely in completing their tasks. Failure to comply with any of these requirements could result in serious damage to the equipment and the property in
which it is situated, as well as severe personal injury or death to themselves and people at the site.
This document is intended for use by owner-authorized rigging, installation, and operating/service personnel. It is expected that these individuals possess independent training that will enable them to perform their assigned tasks properly and safely. It is essential that, prior to performing any task on this equipment, this individual shall have read and understood the on-product labels, this document and any referenced materials. This individual shall also be familiar with and comply with all applicable industry and governmental standards and regulations pertaining to the task in question.
SAFETY SYMBOLS
The following symbols are used in this document to alert the reader to specific situations:
Indicates a possible hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if proper care is not taken.
Identifies a hazard which could lead to damage to the machine, damage to other equipment and/or environmental pollution if proper care is not taken or instructions and are not followed.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which will result in possible injuries or damage to equipment if proper care is not taken.
Highlights additional information useful to the technician in completing the work being performed properly.
External wiring, unless specified as an optional connection in the manufacturer's product line, is NOT to be connected inside the micro panel cabinet. Devices such as relays, switches, transducers and controls and any external wiring must not be installed inside the micro panel. All wiring must be in accordance with Johnson Controls' published specifications and must be performed only by a qualified electrician. Johnson Controls will NOT be responsible for damage/problems resulting from improper connections to the controls or application of improper control signals. Failure to follow this warning will void the manufacturer's warranty and cause serious damage to property or personal injury.
2
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
CHANGEABILITY OF THIS DOCUMENT
In complying with Johnson Controls' policy for continuous product improvement, the information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Johnson Controls makes no commitment to update or provide current information automatically to the manual or product owner. Updated manuals, if applicable, can be obtained by contacting the nearest Johnson Controls Service office or accessing the Johnson Controls QuickLIT website at http://cgproducts. johnsoncontrols.com.
It is the responsibility of rigging, lifting, and operating/ service personnel to verify the applicability of these documents to the equipment. If there is any question
regarding the applicability of these documents, rigging, lifting, and operating/service personnel should verify whether the equipment has been modified and if current literature is available from the owner of the equipment prior to performing any work on the chiller.
CHANGE BARS
Revisions made to this document are indicated with a line along the left or right hand column in the area the revision was made. These revisions are to technical information and any other changes in spelling, grammar or formatting are not included.
ASSOCIATED LITERATURE
MANUAL DESCRIPTION Unit Replacement Parts All Products - Replacement Parts Electrical Connectors All Products - Replacement Parts Fittings
FORM NUMBER 150.27-RP1 50.20-RP1 50.20-RP2
JOHNSON CONTROLS
3
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
4
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION AND SAFETY...................................................................... 11 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 11 Warranty.......................................................................................................................................................... 11 Safety.............................................................................................................................................................. 12 Misuse Of Equipment...................................................................................................................................... 12
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION...............................................................................................................15 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 15 Compressors................................................................................................................................................... 15 Refrigerant Circuits.......................................................................................................................................... 15 Evaporator....................................................................................................................................................... 16 Condenser....................................................................................................................................................... 16 Refrigerant Circuit........................................................................................................................................... 16 Millennium Control Center............................................................................................................................... 16 Accessories and Options................................................................................................................................. 18 Control / Power Panel Components................................................................................................................ 20 Unit Components............................................................................................................................................. 22 Product Identification Number (Pin)................................................................................................................ 23 Refrigerant Flow Diagram - YCRL (Standard)....................................................................................................................................................... 27 Refrigerant Flow Diagram - YCRL (European)...................................................................................................................................................... 28
SECTION 3 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE.........................................................................29 Delivery and Storage....................................................................................................................................... 29 Inspection........................................................................................................................................................ 29 Moving the Unit............................................................................................................................................... 29 Lifting Weights................................................................................................................................................. 30
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................................31 Installation Checklist........................................................................................................................................ 31 Location Requirements................................................................................................................................... 31 Unit Isolation (Noise Sensitive Location)......................................................................................................... 31 Foundation...................................................................................................................................................... 31 Installation Of Vibration Isolators .................................................................................................................... 32 Chilled Liquid Pipework Connection................................................................................................................ 32 Water Treatment.............................................................................................................................................. 34 Option Flanges................................................................................................................................................ 34 Refrigerant Relief Valve Piping........................................................................................................................ 34 Condenser Relief Valve................................................................................................................................... 34 Pipework Arrangement.................................................................................................................................... 35 Connection Types And Sizes........................................................................................................................... 35 Remote Condenser Piping.............................................................................................................................. 36 Refrigerant Line Losses.................................................................................................................................. 36 Pressure Drop Considerations........................................................................................................................ 36 Refrigerant Line Sizing.................................................................................................................................... 36 Oil Traps.......................................................................................................................................................... 37 Refrigerant Charge.......................................................................................................................................... 37 Refrigerant Piping Reference.......................................................................................................................... 37
JOHNSON CONTROLS
5
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D)
Electrical Connection....................................................................................................................................... 40 Field Wiring..................................................................................................................................................... 40 Control Panel Wiring....................................................................................................................................... 41 Power Wiring................................................................................................................................................... 42 Compressor Heaters....................................................................................................................................... 42 Relief Valves.................................................................................................................................................... 42 High Pressure Cutout...................................................................................................................................... 43 Control Wiring.................................................................................................................................................. 44
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA...........................................................................................................................45 Operational Limitations (English and SI)......................................................................................................... 45 Pressure Drop Charts...................................................................................................................................... 46 Ethylene and Propolyne Glycol Correction Factors........................................................................................................................................... 47 Physical Data - Standard And High Efficiency - English.................................................................................. 48 Electrical Data - Single Point........................................................................................................................... 50 Electrical Data - Dual Point............................................................................................................................. 52 Single-Point Supply Connection Terminal Block, Non-Fused Disconnect Switch Or Circuit Breaker.......................................................................................... 54 Dual-Point Supply Connection Terminal Block, Non-Fused Disconnect Switch Or Circuit Breaker.......................................................................................... 55 Electrical Data................................................................................................................................................. 56 Electrical Notes............................................................................................................................................... 57 Elementary Wiring Diagram............................................................................................................................ 60 Wiring Diagrams.............................................................................................................................................. 60 Unit Dimensions - English - Four Compressor................................................................................................ 81 Unit Dimensions - English - Six Compressor.................................................................................................. 82 Isolator Selection Data.................................................................................................................................... 83 Isolator Information.......................................................................................................................................... 84 One Inch Deflection Spring Isolators Installation Instructions......................................................................... 85 Installation of Duralene Vibration Isolators...................................................................................................... 87 Seismic Isolator Installation and Adjustment...................................................................................................................................................... 89
SECTION 6 COMMISSIONING.............................................................................................................................91 General............................................................................................................................................................ 91 Preparation Power Off.................................................................................................................................. 91 Preparation Power On.................................................................................................................................. 92 Equipment Pre Start-Up And Start-Up Checklist.............................................................................................93 Checking Superheat And Subcooling.............................................................................................................. 95 Leak Checking................................................................................................................................................. 95 Unit Operating Sequence................................................................................................................................ 96
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS.............................................................................................................................97 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 97 Status Key....................................................................................................................................................... 99 Display/Print Keys......................................................................................................................................... 105 Entry Keys..................................................................................................................................................... 113 Setpoints Keys.............................................................................................................................................. 114 Unit Keys ...................................................................................................................................................... 121
6
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D)
SECTION 8 UNIT OPERATION..........................................................................................................................127 Capacity Control............................................................................................................................................ 127 Suction Pressure Limit Controls.................................................................................................................... 127 Discharge Pressure Limit Controls................................................................................................................ 127 Leaving Chilled Liquid Control....................................................................................................................... 127 Leaving Chilled Liquid Control Override To Reduce Cycling.......................................................................................................................... 128 Leaving Chilled Liquid System Lead/Lag And Compressor Sequencing...................................................... 128 Return Chilled Liquid Control........................................................................................................................ 129 Return Chilled Liquid System Lead/Lag And Compressor Sequencing........................................................ 130 Anti-Recycle Timer........................................................................................................................................ 130 Anti-Coincidence Timer................................................................................................................................. 131 Evaporator Pump Control And York Hydro Kit Pump Control........................................................................ 131 Evaporator Heater Control............................................................................................................................ 131 Pumpdown Control........................................................................................................................................ 131 Load Limiting................................................................................................................................................. 131 Compressor Run Status................................................................................................................................ 131 Alarm Status.................................................................................................................................................. 132 EMS-PWM Remote Temperature Reset....................................................................................................... 132 Bas/Ems Temperature Reset Using A Voltage Or Current Signal.......................................................................................................................... 132 VDC Pressure Setting Guidelines................................................................................................................. 133
SECTION 9 SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING...........................................................................................135 Clearing History Buffers................................................................................................................................ 135 Service Mode................................................................................................................................................ 135 Service Mode Outputs................................................................................................................................ 135 Service Mode Chiller Configuration............................................................................................................ 136 Service Mode Analog And Digital Inputs............................................................................................................................................................. 136 Control Inputs/Outputs.................................................................................................................................. 137 Microboard Layout......................................................................................................................................... 138 Checking Inputs And Outputs........................................................................................................................ 139 Optional Printer Installation........................................................................................................................... 142 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................. 143
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE............................................................................................................................145 Important....................................................................................................................................................... 145 Compressors................................................................................................................................................. 145 Operating Parameters................................................................................................................................... 145 On-Board Battery Back-Up............................................................................................................................ 145 Overall Unit Inspection.................................................................................................................................. 145 Bacnet, Modbus And Yorktalk 2 Communications............................................................................................................................................ 146 Temperature Conversion Chart..................................................................................................................... 161 R-410A Pressure Temperature Chart......................................................................................................................... 162 Temperature.................................................................................................................................................. 163
JOHNSON CONTROLS
7
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 - YCRL Water Cooled Liquid Chiller15 FIGURE 2 - Control/Panel Components20 FIGURE 3 - Control Power Panel Components21 FIGURE 4 - Unit Components22 FIGURE 5 - Refrigerant Flow Diagram (Standard)27 FIGURE 6 - Refrigerant Flow Diagram (European)28 FIGURE 7 - Chiller Rigging And Lifting Weights30 FIGURE 8 - Grooved Adapter Flanges34 FIGURE 9 - Chilled Liquid System35 FIGURE 10 - Pipework Arrangements Legend35 FIGURE 11 - Cooler Connections35 FIGURE 12 - Example Of Typical Effect Of Suction And Discharge Line Pressure Drop On Capacity And
Power (Ashrae)36 FIGURE 13 - Control Wiring44 FIGURE 14 - Evaporator Water Pressure Drop Curves (English and SI) 46 FIGURE 15 - Glycol Solution Strengths47 FIGURE 16 - Single Point Power Supply Connection Standard Unit54 FIGURE 17 - Dual Point Power Supply Connection Optional55 FIGURE 18 - Standard Power, Single Point And Multiple Point Control Panel Wiring, 4 Compressor Unit 60 FIGURE 19 - Standard Power, Single Point And Multiple Point Control Panel Wiring, 6 Compressor Unit 62 FIGURE 20 - Standard Power And Single Point Power Circuit, 4 Compressor Unit 64 FIGURE 21 - Multiple Point Power Circuit, 4 Compressor Unit65 FIGURE 22 - Standard Power And Single Point Power Circuit, 6 Compressor Unit 66 FIGURE 23 - Multiple Point Power Circuit, 6 Compressor Unit67 FIGURE 24 - Standard Power And Single Point Connection Wiring Diagram, 4 Compressor Unit 68 FIGURE 25 - Multiple Point Power Connection Wiring Diagram, 4 Compressor Unit 70 FIGURE 26 - Standard Power And Single Point Connection Wiring Diagram, 6 Compressor Unit 72 FIGURE 27 - Multiple Point Connection Wiring Diagram, 6 Compressor Unit 74 FIGURE 28 - Standard Power, Single Point And Multiple Point Elementary Wiring Diagram Details,
4 Compressor76 FIGURE 29 - Standard Power, Single Point And Multiple Point Elementary Wiring Diagram Details,
6 Compressor78 FIGURE 30 - EEV Controller Wiring80 FIGURE 31 - Status Key Messages Quick Reference List104 FIGURE 32 - Operation Data108 FIGURE 33 - Setpoints Quick Reference List120 FIGURE 34 - Unit Keys Options Programming Quick Reference List126 FIGURE 35 - Leaving Water Temperature Control Example127 FIGURE 36 - Setpoint Adjust128 FIGURE 37 - Microboard Layout138 FIGURE 38 - I/O Board Relay Contact Architecture141 FIGURE 39 - Printer To Microboard Electrical Connections142 FIGURE 40 - Micro Panel Connections147
8
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 - Condenser / Cooler Connections 35 TABLE 2 - Discharge And Liquid Line Capacities In Tons For Refrigerant 410A 38 TABLE 3 - Minimum Refrigeration Capacity In Tons For Oil Entrainment Up Hot Gas Risers
(Type L Copper Tubing)39 TABLE 4 - YCRL Connection Line Sizes41 TABLE 5 - YCRL Chiller Charges41 TABLE 6 - Temperatures and Flows45 TABLE 7 - Voltage Limitations45 TABLE 8 - Ethylene and Propolyne Glycol Correction Factors47 TABLE 9 - Recommended Glycol Solution Strengths47 TABLE 10 - Micro Panel Power Supply56 TABLE 11 - Voltage Range (Limitations)56 TABLE 12 - Ground Lug Sizing58 TABLE 13 - Setpoints Entry List94 TABLE 14 - Cooling Setpoints, Programmable Limits And Defaults 116 TABLE 15 - Program Key Limits And Default 119 TABLE 16 - Sample Compressor Staging For Return Water Control129 TABLE 17 - Return Chilled Liquid Control For 4 Compressors (6 Steps) 129 TABLE 18 - Return Chilled Liquid Control For 4 Compressors (6 Steps) 130 TABLE 19 - Compressor Operation Load Limiting131 TABLE 20 - I/O Digital Inputs137 TABLE 21 - I/O Digital Outputs137 TABLE 22 - I/O Analog Inputs137 TABLE 23 - I/O Analog Outputs137 TABLE 24 - Entering/Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Sensor, Temperature/Voltage Correlation 139 TABLE 25 - Pressure Transducers140 TABLE 26 - Troubleshooting143 TABLE 27 - Minimum, Maximum and Default Values147 TABLE 28 - Values Required For Bas Communication148 TABLE 29 - Real Time Error Numbers148 TABLE 30 - Bacnet And Modbus Communications Data Map150 TABLE 31 - YorkTalk 2 Communications Data Map155 TABLE 32 - SI Metric Conversion163
JOHNSON CONTROLS
9
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
10
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 1 GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION AND SAFETY
1
INTRODUCTION
WARRANTY
YORK YCRL Remote Condenser Liquid Chillers provide chilled water for all air conditioning applications that use central station air handling or terminal units. They are self-contained and are designed for indoor (new or retrofit) installation. Each unit includes hermetic scroll compressors, a liquid evaporator, and a user-friendly, diagnostic MicroComputer Control Center all mounted on a rugged steel base. Remote condensers (model VDC) are available separately from Johnson Controls. The units are produced at an ISO 9001 registered facility. The YCRL chillers are rated in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590.
YORK YCRL chillers are manufactured to the highest design and construction standards to ensure high performance, reliability and adaptability to all types of air conditioning installations.
The unit is intended for cooling water or glycol solutions and is not suitable for purposes other than those specified in this manual.
This manual contains all the information required for correct installation and commissioning of the unit, together with operating and maintenance instructions. This manual should be read thoroughly before attempting to operate or service the unit.
All procedures detailed in this manual, including installation, commissioning and maintenance tasks must only be performed by suitably trained and qualified personnel.
Johnson Controls warrants all equipment and materials against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of eighteen months from shipment unless extended warranty has been purchased as part of the contract.
The warranty is limited to parts only replacement and shipping of any faulty part or subassembly, which has failed due to poor quality or manufacturing errors. All claims must be supported by evidence that the failure has occurred within the warranty period, and that the unit has been operated within the designed parameters specified. Labor warranty may be purchased as part of the contract. Labor warranty must be performed by Johnson Controls technicians.
All warranty claims must specify the unit model, serial number, order number and run hours/starts. These details are printed on the unit identification plate.
The unit warranty will be void if any modification to the unit is carried out without prior written approval from Johnson Controls.
For warranty purposes, the following conditions must be satisfied:
· The initial start of the unit must be carried out by trained personnel from an Authorized Johnson Controls Service Center. See SECTION 6 COMMISSIONING.
· Only genuine YORK approved spare parts, oils and refrigerants must be used.
The manufacturer will not be liable for any injury or damage caused by incorrect installation, commissioning, operation or maintenance resulting from a failure to follow the procedures and instructions detailed in the manuals.
· All the scheduled maintenance operations detailed in this manual must be performed at the specified times by suitably trained and qualified personnel. See SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE.
· Failure to satisfy any of these conditions will automatically void the warranty.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
11
SECTION 1 GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION AND SAFETY
SAFETY
Standards for Safety YCRL chillers are designed and built within an ISO 9002 accredited design and manufacturing organization. Products must be designed, tested, rated and certified in accordance with, and installed in compliance with applicable sections of the following Standards and Codes:
1. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
2. ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency Compliance.
3. ANSI/NFPA Standard 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
5. ASHRAE 34 Number Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants.
6. ARI Standard 550/590 Positive Displacement Compressors and Water Cooled Rotary Screw Water-Chilling Packages.
7. Conform to UL code 1995 for construction of chillers and provide ETL/cETL listing label.
8. Manufactured in facility registered to ISO 9001.
9. OSHA Occupied Safety and Health Act.
Responsibility for Safety Every care has been taken in the design and manufacture of the unit to ensure compliance with the safety requirements listed above. However, the individual operating or working on any machinery is primarily responsible for:
· Personal safety, safety of other personnel, and the machinery.
· Correct utilization of the machinery in accordance with the procedures detailed in the manuals.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
MISUSE OF EQUIPMENT
Suitability for Application
The unit is intended for cooling water or glycol solutions and is not suitable for purposes other than those specified in these instructions. Any use of the equipment other than its intended use, or operation of the equipment contrary to the relevant procedures may result in injury to the operator, or damage to the equipment.
The unit must not be operated outside the design parameters specified in this manual.
Structural Support
Structural support of the unit must be provided as indicated in these instructions. Failure to provide proper support may result in injury to the operator, or damage to the equipment and/or building.
Mechanical Strength
The unit is not designed to withstand loads or stresses from adjacent equipment, pipework or structures. Additional components must not be mounted on the unit. Any such extraneous loads may cause structural failure and may result in injury to the operator, or damage to the equipment.
General Access
There are a number of areas and features, which may be a hazard and potentially cause injury when working on the unit unless suitable safety precautions are taken. It is important to ensure access to the unit is restricted to suitably qualified persons who are familiar with the potential hazards and precautions necessary for safe operation and maintenance of equipment containing high temperatures, pressures and voltages.
Pressure Systems
The unit contains refrigerant vapor and liquid under pressure, release of which can be a danger and cause injury. The user should ensure that care is taken during installation, operation and maintenance to avoid damage to the pressure system. No attempt should be made to gain access to the component parts of the pressure system other than by suitably trained and qualified personnel.
12
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Electrical
The unit must be grounded. No installation or maintenance work should be attempted on the electrical equipment without first switching power OFF, isolating and locking-off the power supply. Servicing and maintenance on live equipment must only be performed by suitably trained and qualified personnel. No attempt should be made to gain access to the control panel or electrical enclosures during normal operation of the unit.
Rotating Parts
Fan guards must be fitted at all times and not removed unless the power supply has been isolated. If ductwork is to be fitted, requiring the wire fan guards to be removed, alternative safety measures must be taken to protect against the risk of injury from rotating fans.
Sharp Edges
The fins on the air-cooled condenser coils have sharp metal edges. Reasonable care should be taken when working in contact with the coils to avoid the risk of minor abrasions and lacerations. The use of gloves is recommended.
Frame rails, brakes, and other components may also have sharp edges. Reasonable care should be taken when working in contact with any components to avoid risk of minor abrasions and lacerations.
SECTION 1 GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION AND SAFETY
Refrigerants and Oils
1
Refrigerants and oils used in the unit are generally
nontoxic, non-flammable and non-corrosive, and pose
no special safety hazards. However, use of gloves and
safety glasses is recommended when working on the
unit. The buildup of refrigerant vapor, from a leak for
example, does pose a risk of asphyxiation in confined
or enclosed spaces and attention should be given to
good ventilation.
High Temperature and Pressure Cleaning
High temperature and pressure cleaning methods (for example, steam cleaning) should not be used on any part of the pressure system as this may cause operation of the pressure relief device(s). Detergents and solvents, which may cause corrosion, should also be avoided.
Emergency Shutdown
In case of emergency, the control panel is fitted with a Unit Switch to stop the unit in an emergency. When operated, it removes the low voltage 120 VAC electrical supply from the inverter system, thus shutting down the unit.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
13
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
14
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION
YORK YCRL chillers are designed for water or waterglycol cooling.
All models are designed for indoor installation. The units are completely assembled with all interconnecting refrigerant piping and internal wiring ready for field connection to a remote condenser.
The unit consists of up to six scroll compressors in a corresponding number of separate refrigerant circuits, a shell and tube DX evaporator, and oil separators for each circuit.
Before delivery, the unit is pressure tested, evacuated, and fully charged with a nitrogen holding charge and YORK "V" oil (POE synthetic) in each of the independent refrigerant circuits. After assembly, an operational test is performed with water flowing through the cooler to ensure that each refrigerant circuit operates correctly.
Additional oil change may be required depending upon the length of piping.
COMPRESSORS
The chiller utilizes suction-gas cooled hermetic, scroll 2
compressors. The YCRL compressors incorporate a compliant scroll design in both the axial and radial direction. All rotating parts are statically and dynamically balanced. A large internal volume and oil reservoir provides greater liquid tolerance. Compressor crankcase heaters are also included for extra protection against liquid migration. All compressors are mounted on isolator pads to reduce transmission of vibration to the rest of the unit.
REFRIGERANT CIRCUITS
Two independent refrigerant circuits are provided on each unit. All piping will be copper with brazed joints.
Liquid line components include: a shut off valve with charging port, a high absorption removable core filterdrier, a solenoid valve, a sight glass with moisture indicator and a thermal expansion valve. The entire suction line and the liquid lines between the expansion valve and the cooler are covered with flexible, closed-cell insulation.
Suction line components include: a pressure relief valve, a pressure transducer and a service valve. Optional isolation ball valves are available. Suction lines are covered with flexible, closed-cell insulation.
The unit framework is fabricated using heavy-gauge galvanized steel which is zinc phosphate pre-treated and powder coated to minimize corrosion.
Discharge lines include service and isolation (ball) valves, two high-pressure cutout switches, a pressure transducer and a pressure relief valve.
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COOLER
Figure 1 - YCRL WATER COOLED LIQUID CHILLER
JOHNSON CONTROLS
CONTROL PANEL
POWER SECTION 15
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
EVAPORATOR
The 2-pass dual circuit shell and tube type direct expansion (DX) evaporator has refrigerant in the tubes and chilled liquid flowing through the baffled shell. The waterside (shell) design working pressure of the cooler is 150 psig (10.3 barg). The refrigerant side (tubes) design working pressure is 450 psig (31.0 barg). The refrigerant side is protected by pressure relief valve(s).
The evaporator must have water pass baffles fabricated from galvanized steel to resist corrosion. Removable heads are provided for access to internally enhanced, seamless, copper tubes. Water vent and drain connections are included. The cooler is insulated with 3/4 in. (19 mm) flexible closed-cell foam.
Water connection to the evaporator is via grooved connections. Flange connections are available as an option. The shell will be constructed and tested in accordance with Section VII, Division 1 of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code. The water side is exempt per paragraph U-1 (ºC) of Section VII, Division 1 of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code.
The evaporator is constructed and tested in accordance with applicable sections of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division (1). The water side will be exempt per paragraph U-1, (ºC) (6).
A strainer with a mesh size between 0.5 mm and 1.5 mm (40 mesh) is recommended upstream of the evaporator to prevent clogging.
CONDENSER
The condenser can be either a field supplied YORK VDC remote air-cooled condenser (available separately from Johnson Controls) or an evaporative condenser.
REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT
Two independent refrigerant circuits will be furnished on each unit. All piping will be copper with brazed joints. The liquid line will include: a shutoff valve with charging port; sight-glass with moisture indicator; thermal expansion valve; solenoid valve; and high absorption removable-core filter drier. The entire suction line and the liquid line between the expansion valve and the evaporator will be insulated with flexible, closed-cell, foam insulation.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Refrigerant R-410A is field supplied.
MILLENNIUM CONTROL CENTER All controls are contained in a NEMA 1 (and equivalent to IP32) powder painted steel cabinet with hinged outer door and includes:
· Liquid Crystal Display with Light Emitting Diode backlighting for outdoor viewing: · Two display lines · Twenty characters per line
· Color coded 12-button non-tactile keypad with sections for: · Control supply fuses and connections for a remote emergency stop device. · ON/OFF rocker switch, microcomputer keypad and display, microprocessor board, I/O expansion board, relay boards, and 24 V fused power supply board. · Customer terminal block for control inputs and liquid flow switch.
The microprocessor control includes:
· Automatic control of compressor start/stop, anticoincidence and anti-recycle timers, automatic pumpdown on shutdown, evaporator pump and unit alarm contacts. Automatic reset to normal chiller operation after power failure.
· Remote water temperature reset via a pulse width modulated (PWM) input signal or up to two steps of demand (load) limiting.
· Software stored in non-volatile memory (EPROM), with programmed setpoints retained in a lithium battery backed Real Time Clock (RTC) memory for a minimum of five years.
· Forty character liquid crystal display, with description available in five languages (English, French, German, Spanish, or Italian).
16
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Programmable Setpoints · Chilled liquid temperature setpoint and range · Remote reset temperature range · Set daily schedule/holiday for start/stop · Manual override for servicing · Low liquid temperature cutout · Low suction pressure cutout · High discharge pressure cutout · Anti-recycle timer (compressor start cycle time) · Anti-coincident timer (delay compressor starts)
Displayed Data · Return and leaving liquid temperature · Low leaving liquid temperature cutout setting · Metric or Imperial data · Discharge and suction pressure cutout settings · System discharge and suction pressure · Anti-recycle timer status for each compressor · Anti-coincident system start timer condition · Compressor run status · No cooling load condition · Day, date and time · Daily start/stop times · Holiday status · Automatic or manual system lead/lag control · Lead system definition · Compressor starts and operating hours (each compressor) · Run permissive status · Number of compressors running
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
· Liquid solenoid valve status
· Load and unload timer status
2
· Water pump status
System Safeties
System Safeties cause individual compressors to perform auto shut down and require manual reset in the event of three trips in a 90-minute time period:
· High discharge pressure · Low suction pressure · High pressure switches · Motor protector
Unit Safeties
Unit Safeties are automatic reset and cause all compressors to shut down:
· Low leaving chilled liquid temperature · Under voltage · Loss of liquid flow (through flow switch) · Low battery
Power and Control Panels
All power and controls are contained in an IP32 cabinet with hinged, latched and gasket sealed outer doors.
Power Panel
The power panel includes factory mounted compressor contactors and manual motor starters to provide overload and short circuit protection.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
17
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
Power Options
Single Point Supply Terminal Block The standard power wiring connection on all models is a single point power connection to a factory provided terminal block. Components included are the enclosure, terminal-block and interconnecting wiring to the compressors. Separate external protection must be supplied, by others, in the incoming power wiring. (Do not include this option if either the Single-Point Non-fused Disconnect Switch or Single-point Circuit Breaker options have been included.) (Factory-Mounted)
Single Point Non-Fused Disconnect Switch An optional unit-mounted disconnect switch with external, lockable handle (in compliance with Article 440-14 of NEC), can be supplied to isolate the unit power voltage for servicing. Separate external fusing must be supplied, by others in the power wiring, which must comply with the National Electrical Code and/or local codes. (Factory-Mounted)
Single Point Circuit Breaker An optional unit mounted circuit breaker with external, lockable handle (in compliance with NEC Article 44014); can be supplied to isolate the power voltage for servicing. (Factory-Mounted)
Multiple Point Circuit Breaker Optional multiple point supply with independent system circuit breakers and locking external handles (in compliance with Article 440-14 of N.E.C) can be factory supplied. (Factory-Mounted).
Control Transformer Converts unit power voltage to 115-1-60 (0.5 KVA or 1.0 KVA capacity). Factory mounting includes primary and secondary wiring between the transformer and the control panel. (Factory-Mounted)
Compressor External Overloads Optional compressor motor overloads can be factory mounted in the unit control/power panel. This option will reduce the chiller MCA (minimum circuit ampacity) and allow for reduced wire sizing to the unit. This option is not available for applications with Leaving Condenser Water Temperature (LCWT) greater than 105ºF (40.6ºC). (Factory-Mounted)
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Controls Options
Building Automation System Interface A standard feature of the YCRL control panel to accept a pulse width modulated (PWM), 4 mA to 20 mA, or 0 VDC to 10 VDC input to reset the leaving chilled liquid temperature from a Building Automation System. (Factory-Mounted)
Language LCD and Keypad Standard display language and keypad is in English. Spanish, French, German, and Italian are available as an option. (Factory-Mounted)
Heat Exchanger Options
Flow Switch An optional flow switch can be factory supplied for the evaporator. Vapor-proof SPDT, NEMA 3R switch, 150 psig (10.3 bar) DWP, 20°F to 250°F (-29°C to 121°C) with 1 in. NPT (IPS) connection for upright mounting in horizontal pipe. The flow switch or its equivalent must be furnished with each unit. (Field mounted)
Differential Pressure Switch An alternative option to the paddle-type flow switch. 3 psig to 45 psig (0.2 bar to 3 bar) range with 1/4 in. NPTE pressure connections. (Field Mounted)
Pressure Vessel Codes Evaporators and condensers are to be supplied (standard) in conformance with the A.S.M.E. pressure codes.
Flanges (ANSI/AWWA C-606 Couplings Type) Consists of (2) flange adapters for grooved end pipe on evaporator and condenser. Standard 150 psi (10.3 bar). (Field Kit, matching pipe flange by contractor.)
Double Thick Insulation Double thick (1 1/2 in.) insulation provided on the evaporator. (Factory-Mounted)
18
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Chiller Options
Final Paint Overspray Overspray painting of unit after assembly. (FactoryMounted)
Service Isolation Valve Service suction isolation valve added to unit per system in addition to the standard discharge service valve. (Factory Mounted)
Hot Gas By-pass Permits continuous, stable operation at capacities below the minimum step of compressor unloading to as low as 5% capacity (depending on both the unit and operating conditions) by introducing an artificial load on the evaporator. Hot gas by-pass is installed on only refrigerant system #2 on two-circuited units. (FactoryMounted)
Compressor Acoustic Sound Blanket Each compressor is individually enclosed by an acoustic sound blanket. The sound blankets are made with one layer of acoustical absorbent textile fiber of 5/8 in. (15 mm) thickness; one layer of anti-vibrating heavy material thickness of 1/8 in. (3 mm). Both are closed by two sheets of welded PVC, reinforced for temperature and UV resistance. (Factory- Mounted)
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Vibration Isolation
Neoprene Isolation
Recommended for normal installations. Provides very 2
good performance in most applications for the least cost. (Field-mounted)
One Inch Spring Isolators Level adjustable, spring and cage type isolators for mounting under the unit base rails. One inch nominal deflection may vary slightly by application. (Field -Mounted)
Two Inch Seismic Isolators Restrained spring-flex mountings incorporate a rugged welded steel housing with vertical and horizontal limit stops. Housings designed to withstand a minimum 1.0g accelerated force in all directions to two inches. Level adjustable, deflection may vary slightly by application. (Field-Mounted)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
19
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
CONTROL / POWER PANEL COMPONENTS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
DISPLAY
CTB1 (Flow Switch and Load Limit)
Figure 2 - CONTROL/PANEL COMPONENTS 20
UNIT SWITCH
IPU II/ IO BOARD
LD12922
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
CONTROL / POWER PANEL COMPONENTS (CONT'D)
2
TRANSFORMER FUSE BLOCK
CONTROL RELAY
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
GROUND LUG
CONTROL RELAY
FTB COMPRESSOR CONTACTORS
OPTIONAL SINGLE POINT CONNECTIONS
Figure 3 - CONTROL POWER PANEL COMPONENTS
JOHNSON CONTROLS
CTB2 COMPRESSOR CONTACTORS
LD14533
21
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SINGLE SPEED SCROLL COMPRESSORS
UNIT COMPONENTS
CONTROL PANEL WITH KEYPAD AND
DISPLAY
POWER PANEL EVAPORATOR
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
ISOLATION VALVES (OPT)
FORMED STEEL BASE RAILS
LIQUID LINE STUB-OUT
FILTER DRIERS LIQUID
LINE SOLENOID
VALVE
SIGHT GLASS
TXV VALVE
SINGLE SPEED SCROLL COMPRESSORS
OPTIONAL ISOLATION VALVE
COMPRESSOR CRANKCASE HEATER
EVAPORATOR WATER INLET
EVAPORATOR WATER OUTLET
TXV VALVE
SIGHT GLASS
LIQUID LINE
SOLENOID
VALVE FILTER
DRIERS
Figure 4 - UNIT COMPONENTS 22
EVAPORATOR
LD14534
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)
'$
2
R = Remote Condenser
FEATURE CONTRACT
ORDER MODEL
CAP
UNIT REF
VOLTS
STARTER DESIGN
DEV
DESCRIPTION CONTRACT NUMBER
ORDER QUANTITY MODEL (PIN 1-4)
CAPACITY (PIN 5-8)
UNIT DESIGNATOR (PIN 9) REFRIGERANT (PIN 10)
VOLTAGE (PIN 11 AND 12)
STARTER (PIN 13) DESIGN SERIES (PIN 14) DEVELOPMENT LEVEL
(PIN 15)
OPTION NUM QTY YCRL 0064 0074 0084 0096 0118 0126 0156 0177 0198 H E 17 28 40 46 50 58 X T A
A
XX
POWER
POWER FIELD (PIN 16 AND 17)
BX SD
MB
QQ
JOHNSON CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION CONTRACT NUMBER = {CONTRACT/NUM}
ORDER QUANTITY = {ORDER/QTY} YCRL 0064 0074 0084 0096 0118 0126 0156 0177 0198
HIGH EFFICIENCY UNIT R-410A 200/3/60 230/3/60 380/3/60 460/3/60
380-415/3/50 575/3/60
ACROSS THE LINE START SOFT START (FACTORY) (50 Hz ONLY)
DESIGN SERIES A
DEVELOPMENT LEVEL B
STANDARD POWER OPTION (SP SUPPLY TERMINAL BLOCK) SP CIRCUIT BREAKER W/ LOCKABLE HANDLE SP SUPPLY NF DISCONNECT SWITCH MP SUPPLY W/IND SYS CB AND L. EXT HANDLES
SPECIAL QUOTE
23
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
FEATURE TRANS PIN 19 PIN 20 BAS
LCD
RDOUT SAFETY HPUMP CTEMP PIN 28
TEMP
CHICAGO
VALVES HGBP PIN34
DESCRIPTION CONTROL TRANSFORMER
(PIN 18) PIN 19 PIN 20 BAS INTERFACE (PIN 21)
LANGUAGE (PIN 22)
OPTION X T Q X Q X Q X Q X F G I S Q
X READOUT KITS (PIN 23)
Q
C
SAFETY CODES (PIN 24)
L
Q
X HEAT PUMP (PIN 25)
Q
CONDENSER WATER
XX
TEMP (PIN 26 AND 27)
Q
X PIN 28
Q
EVAPORATOR WATER
TS
TEMP (PIN 29 AND 30) Q
X
G CHICAGO CODE KIT
(PIN 31)
R
S
Q
X
VALVES (PIN 32)
E
Q
X
HOT GAS BY-PASS (PIN 33)
1
Q
X PIN 34
Q
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
DESCRIPTION NO OPTION
CONTROL TRANSFORMER (FACTORY) SPECIAL QUOTE NO OPTION SPECIAL QUOTE NO OPTION SPECIAL QUOTE
BAS/EMS TEMP RESET/OFFSET (STANDARD) SPECIAL QUOTE
STANDARD (ENGLISH) LCD AND KEYPAD DISPLAY FRENCH LCD AND KEYPAD DISPLAY GERMAN LCD AND KEYPAD DISPLAY ITALIAN LCD AND KEYPAD DISPLAY SPANISH LCD AND KEYPAD DISPLAY SPECIAL QUOTE
BOTH DISCHARGE AND SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS / READOUT (STANDARD) SPECIAL QUOTE EUROPEAN SAFETY CODE (CE) N AMERICAN SAFETY CODE (CUL/CETL) SPECIAL QUOTE NO OPTION SPECIAL QUOTE NO OPTION SPECIAL QUOTE NO SEQUENCE KIT SPECIAL QUOTE NUM LEAVING SUPPLY WATER TEMP {TEMP/NUM} DEGREES SPECIAL LST REQUIREMENTS NO OPTION BOTH SUCTION ISOLATION VALVES AND DUAL RELIEF VALVES DUAL RELIEF VALVES (50 Hz ONLY) SERVICE ISOLATION VALVES (SUCTION) SPECIAL QUOTE SOLENOID VALVES (LIQUID LINE) ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE SPECIAL QUOTE NO OPTION HOT GAS BY-PASS (1 CIRCUIT) SPECIAL QUOTE NO OPTION SPECIAL QUOTE
24
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
X
NO OPTION
OVERLOAD
COMPRESSOR OVERLOADS (PIN 35)
E
Q
COMPRESSOR EXTERNAL OVERLOADS SPECIAL QUOTE
2
PRESSURE
PRESSURE CONTROL (PIN 36)
X Q
NO OPTION SPECIAL QUOTE
X
PIN 37
PIN 37
Q
NO OPTION SPECIAL QUOTE
X
DWP
DWP (PIN 38)
Q
150 PSIG DWP WATERSIDE SPECIAL QUOTE
X
SINGLE THICK INSULATION
INS
INSULATION (PIN 39)
D
DOUBLE THICK INSULATION
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
X
NO FLANGE KIT
FLANGES
FLANGES (PIN 40)
V
VITAULIC FLANGE KIT
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
X
NO FLOW SWITCH
D
ONE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH PER CHILLER
E
TWO DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES PER CHILLER
EVAPFLOW
EVAP FLOW SWITCH (PIN 41)
F
THREE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES PER CHILLER
S
ONE FLOW SWITCH PER CHILLER
T
TWO FLOW SWITCHES PER CHILLER
U
THREE FLOW SWITCHES PER CHILLER
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
A
ASME PRESSURE VESSEL AND ASSOCIATED CODES
VESSEL
VESSEL CODES (PIN 42)
E
EUROPEAN "CE" PRESSURE VESSEL DIRECTIVE
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
X
PIN43
PIN 43
Q
NO OPTION SPECIAL QUOTE
X
PIN44
PIN 44
Q
NO OPTION SPECIAL QUOTE
CONDTUBE
CONDENSER TUBES (PIN 45)
X Q
NO OPTION SPECIAL QUOTE
X
HEAT
HEAT RECOVERY (PIN 46)
Q
NO OPTION SPECIAL QUOTE
CONDFLOW
CONDENDENSER FLOW SWITCH (PIN 47)
X Q
NO FLOW SWITCH SPECIAL QUOTE
X
PIN48
PIN 48
Q
NO OPTION SPECIAL QUOTE
X
ACOUSTIC
ACOUSTICAL ARRGT. (PIN 49)
B
Q
NO ACOUSTIC ENCLOSURE COMPRESSOR SOUND BLANKET
SPECIAL QUOTE
JOHNSON CONTROLS
25
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
FEATURE SRDOCS
FORM PIN52 PAINT
ISOL PIN55 PIN56
SHIP
PIN 58 PIN 59 PIN 60 MFG LOC
YW SQ
DESCRIPTION
SR DOCUMENTS (PIN 50)
SHIPMENT FORM (PIN 51) PIN 52
OVERSPRAY PAINT (53)
ISOLATORS (PIN 54) PIN 55 PIN 56
SHIP INSTRUCTIONS (PIN 57)
PIN 58 PIN 59 PIN 60 PLANT OF MFG (PIN 61) MFG LOCATION YORKWORKS VERSION SPECIAL QUOTE
OPTION X A B M W Q
2
Q X Q X S Q X 1 N S Q
X A
B
C
M
N
P
U Q
X Q X Q R CUR MEX MTY SAT CV UV Q
DESCRIPTION NO DOCUMENTS REQUIRED BASE MATERIAL AND WITNESS DOCUMENTS
BASE DOCUMENT BASE AND MATERIAL DOCUMENTS BASE AND WITNESS DOCUMENTS
SPECIAL QUOTE FORM 2 SHIPMENT (COMPLETE UNIT, HOLDING CHARGE) (STANDARD)
SPECIAL QUOTE NO OPTION
SPECIAL QUOTE NO FINAL OVERSPRAY PAINT
FINAL OVERSPRAY PAINT SPECIAL QUOTE NO ISOLATORS 1" DEFLECTION NEOPRENE SEISMIC SPECIAL QUOTE
MARKETING PURPOSES ONLY! MARKETING PURPOSES ONLY! NO CONTAINERIZATION REQUIRED WITH SHIPPING BAG BUY AMERICA ACT COMPLIANCE WITH SHIPPING BAG BOTH BUY AMERICA ACT COMPLIANCE AND CONTAINER SHIPPED WITHOUT SHIPPING BAG (FACTORY PREP) CONTAINER SHIPPED WITHOUT SHIPPING BAG (FACTORY LOAD FOR US PORT) CONTAINER SHIPPED WITHOUT SHIPPING BAG (FACTORY LOAD FOR MEXICO PORT) NO CONTAINERIZATION REQUIRED WITHOUT SHIPPING BAG CONTAINER SHIPPED WITHOUT SHIPPING BAG
(FACTORY PREP) BUY AMERICA ACT COMPLIANCE WITHOUT SHIPPING BAG
SPECIAL QUOTE MARKETING PURPOSES ONLY!
NO OPTION SPECIAL QUOTE
NO OPTION SPECIAL QUOTE
MONTERREY CURITIBA, BRAZIL
MEXICO, ES MONTERY, BE SAN ANTONIO TEXAS YORKWORKS CONFIGURATION VERSION {YW/CV} YORKWORKS UPLOAD VERSION {YW/UV} SPECIAL QUOTE
26
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM - YCRL (STANDARD)
Low-pressure liquid refrigerant enters the cooler tubes and is evaporated and superheated by the heat energy absorbed from the chilled liquid passing through the cooler shell. Low-pressure vapor enters the compressor where pressure and superheat are increased. The high pressure superheat refrigerant enters the remote
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
air cooled condenser where heat is rejected via the condenser coil and fans. The fully condensed and sub-
2
cooled liquid leaves the remote air cooled condenser
and enters the expansion valve, where pressure reduc-
tion and further cooling takes place. The low-pressure
liquid refrigerant then returns to the cooler.
FIELD PROVIDED OPTIONAL RELIEF VALVE
BY OTHERS
Figure 5 - REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM (STANDARD)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
27
SECTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM - YCRL (EUROPEAN)
Low-pressure liquid refrigerant enters the cooler tubes and is evaporated and superheated by the heat energy absorbed from the chilled liquid passing through the cooler shell. Low-pressure vapor enters the compressor where pressure and superheat are increased. The high pressure superheat refrigerant enters the remote
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
air cooled condenser where heat is rejected via the condenser coil and fans. The fully condensed and subcooled liquid leaves the remote air cooled condenser and enters the expansion valve, where pressure reduction and further cooling takes place. The low-pressure liquid refrigerant then returns to the cooler.
Control Functions: DV - Display Value CHT - Chilled Liquid Temperature HPC - High Pressure Cutout LPC - Low Pressure Cutout HPL - High Pressure Load Limiting
38.6 bar Refer to Options
Condenser
36.3 bar 34.7 bar
38.6 bar
Refer to Options
Compressors
Option
27.6 bar
Refer to Options
Components: Pressure Relief Valve Service (Ball) Valve Expansion Valve
S
Solenoid Valve Sight Glass Sensor Pressure or Temperature Service (Stop) Access Valve PS Pressure Switch Filter Drier (Removable Core)
Evaporator
-YLLSV
Figure 6 - REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM (EUROPEAN)
LD12938
28
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 3 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
3
LD19197
Rigging and lifting should only be done by a professional rigger in accordance with a written rigging and lifting plan. The most appropriate rigging and lifting method will depend on job specific factors, such as the rigging equipment available and site needs. Therefore, a professional rigger must determine the rigging and lifting method to be used, and it is beyond the scope of this manual to specify rigging and lifting details.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
To ensure consistent quality and maximum reliability, all units are tested and inspected before leaving the factory. Units are shipped completely assembled and containing refrigerant under pressure. Units are shipped without export crating unless this has been specified on the Sales Order.
If the unit is to be put into storage, before installation, the following precautions should be observed:
· Ensure that all openings, such as water connections, are securely capped.
· Do not store where exposed to ambient air temperatures exceeding 107°F (42°C).
· The unit should be stored in a location where there is minimal activity to limit the risk of accidental physical damage.
· To prevent inadvertent operation of the pressure relief devices the unit must not be steam cleaned.
· It is recommended that the unit is periodically inspected during storage.
INSPECTION
Immediately upon receiving the unit, it should be inspected for possible damage which may have occurred during transit. If damage is evident, it should be noted in the carrier's freight bill. A written request for inspection by the carrier's agent should be made at once. See "Instruction Manual", Form 50.15-NM for more information and details.
Major damage must be reported immediately to your local Johnson Controls representative.
MOVING THE UNIT
Before moving the unit, ensure that the installation site is suitable for installing the unit and is capable of supporting the weight of the unit and all associated services.
The units are designed to be lifted using either lifting chains or a fork lift.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
29
SECTION 3 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
Lifting by Crane / Hoist A spreader frame should be used to prevent damage to the unit from the lifting chains (see Figure 7 on page 30).
The unit must only be lifted at the points provided
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
LIFTING WEIGHTS For details of weights and weight distribution see Table below.
1453.jpeg
Figure 7 - CHILLER RIGGING AND LIFTING WEIGHTS
0064HE
0074HE
LIFTING WEIGHTS - High Efficiency (HE)
YCRL 60 Hz MODEL - lb (kg)
0084HE
0096HE
0118HE
0126HE
0156HE
0177SE
0198SE
2883 (1308) 3261 (1479) 3439 (1560) 3753 (1702) 3705 (1681) 4587 (2081) 4989 (2263) 4418 (2004) 4773 (2165)
30
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION
To ensure warranty coverage, this equipment must be commissioned and serviced by an authorized Johnson Controls service mechanic or a qualified service person experienced in chiller installation. Installation must comply with all applicable codes, particularly in regard to electrical wiring and other safety elements such as relief valves, HP cutout settings, design working pressures, and ventilation requirements consistent with the amount and type of refrigerant charge.
Lethal voltages exist within the control panels. Before servicing, open and tag all disconnect switches.
INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
The following items, 1 through 5, must be checked before placing the units in operation:
1. Inspect the unit for shipping damage.
2. Rig unit using spreader bars.
3. Open the unit only to install water piping system. Do not remove protective covers from water connections until piping is ready for attachment. Check water piping to ensure cleanliness.
4. Pipe unit using good piping practice (refer to ASHRAE handbook Section 215 and 195).
5. Check to see that the unit is installed and operated within limitations (see LIMITATIONS).
The following pages outline detailed procedures to be followed to install and start-up the chiller.
LOCATION REQUIREMENTS
To achieve optimum performance and trouble-free service, it is essential that the proposed installation site meets with the location and space requirements for the model being installed. For dimensions, weight and space requirements, including service access details, see SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA.
The clearances recommended are nominal for the safe operation and maintenance of the unit and power and control panels. Local health and safety regulations, or practical considerations for service replacement of large components, may require larger clearances than those given in Section 5 Technical Data.
Units should be installed indoors where they are not
exposed to rain or water splash. Chillers should be
located near a drain. The use of chillers in corrosive,
dusty or explosive atmospheres should be avoided unless the unit is properly protected. A unit in a clean
4
room will run best, require least maintenance, and last
longest. Heat or ventilation may be required to main-
tain the ambient between 40°F and 115°F (44°C and
46.1°C).
Units are designed for indoor installation and not intended for wet, corrosive or explosive atmospheres. Installation should allow for water drain, ventilation and sufficient clearance for service, including tube cleaning.
UNIT ISOLATION (NOISE SENSITIVE LOCATION)
For installation in equipment rooms near noise-critical areas, common walls should be of adequate sound attenuating construction, all doors should be tightly gasketed, and the unit should have vibration isolators fitted.
FOUNDATION
The unit must be installed on a suitable flat and level concrete base that extends to fully support the unit base frame. The chiller foundation must be rigid to reduce vibration transmission to a minimum. All upper story installations should use vibration isolators under the unit base. To maintain isolator efficiency, no mechanical ties should be made to the building. Properly selected flexible connectors and piping isolators are recommended. All the above recommendations will help to reduce vibration transmission and `result in a quieter operation.
On basement foundations remove a portion of the basement floor so that a concrete base can be poured resting on the ground, with a corkboard installed on both sides, and a waterproof sealing compound.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
31
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION
The concrete base must capable o f supporting 150% of the operating weight. In case of upper floors, the unit and piping should be isolated from walls and ceiling. The unit may be bolted to the foundation using 1/2 in. (13 mm) dia. holes in the base of the framework. When lower transmitted vibration levels are required optional anti-vibration isolators can be supplied loose for site installation.
INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATORS
An optional set of vibration isolators can he supplied loose with each unit (see SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA for details).
CHILLED LIQUID PIPEWORK CONNECTION
General Requirements The following piping recommendations are intended to ensure satisfactory operation of the unit. Failure to follow these recommendations could cause damage to the unit, or loss of performance, and may invalidate the warranty.
The maximum flow rate and pressure drop for the cooler and condenser must not be exceeded at any time. See Section 5 Technical Data for details.
The water must enter the heat exchanger(s) by the inlet connection. See SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA for details.
A flow switch or differential switch must be installed in the customer pipework at the outlet of the exchangers as shown in the arrangement diagrams, and wired back to the control panel using screened cable. There should be a straight horizontal run of at least five diameters on each side of the switch. Adjust the flow switch paddle to the size of the pipe in which it is to be installed (refer to manufacturer's instructions furnished with the switch). The switch is to be wired to terminals 13 14 of CTBl located in the control pane1, as shown on the unit wiring diagram. This is to prevent damage to the exchanges caused inadequate liquid flow.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
The flow switch used must have gold plated contacts for low voltage/current operation. Paddle type flow switches suitable for 150 psig (10 barg) working pressure and having 1 in. N.P.T. connection can be obtained from Johnson Controls as an option for the unit.
· The liquid pump(s) installed in the pipework system(s) should discharged directly into the unit heat exchanger section of the system. The pump(s) require an auto-starter (by others) to be wired to the control panel. For details refer to "Electrical Connection".
· All chilled liquid piping should he thoroughly flushed to free it from foreign material before the system is placed into operation. Use care not to flush any foreign material into or through the cooler.
· Pipework and fittings must he separately supported to prevent any loading on the heat exchanger(s). Flexible connections are recommended which will also minimize transmission of vibrations to the building. Flexible connections must he used if the unit is mounted on anti-vibration mounts as some movement of the unit can he expected in normal operation.
· Pipework and fittings immediately next to the heat exchangers should he readily de-mountable to enable cleaning prior to operation, and to facilitate visual inspection of the exchanger nozzles.
· Each heat exchanger must be protected by a strainer, preferably of 40 mesh, fitted as close as possible to the liquid inlet connection in both the evaporator and condenser water lines and provided with a means of local isolation.
· The heat exchanger(s) must not he exposed to flushing velocities or debris released during flushing. It is recommended that a suitably sized bypass and valve arrangement is installed to allow flushing of the pipework system. The bypass can he used during maintenance to isolate the heat exchanger with-out disrupting flow to other units.
32
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
· Thermometer and pressure gauge connections should he provided on the inlet and outlet connections of each heat exchanger.
· Drain and air vent connections should be provided at all low and high points in the pipework to permit drainage of the cooler and system, and to vent any air in the pipes.
· Liquid systems at risk of freezing, due to low ambient temperatures, should be protected using insulation and heater tape and/or a suitable glycol solution. The liquid pump(s) must also be used to ensure liquid is circulated when the ambient temperature approaches freezing point. Insulation should also he installed around the heat exchanger nozzles.
· A small valve or valves should be installed at the highest point or points in the chilled water piping to allow any trapped air to be purged. Vent and drain connections should be extended beyond the insulation to make them accessible.
· Piping must comply in all respects with applicable local plumbing codes and ordinances. In no case should the unit support the weight of connecting piping. Since elbows, tees, and valves increase pressure drop, all piping should be kept as simple as possible. Hand stop valves should be installed where required to facilitate servicing. Piping to the inlet and outlet connections of the evaporator and condenser may include high-pressure rubber hose or piping loops to ensure against water pump transmission of vibration.
· Facilities should be provided for measuring temperature and pressure in the evaporator and condenser field piping. Drain connections should be provided at all low points to permit complete drainage of the evaporator(s), condenser(s), and system piping. This is especially important if the unit is located in an unheated room where freezing could prevail. Water lines subjected to ambient temperatures below freezing may require heater cables or antifreeze (by others).
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION
Any debris left in the water pipework between the strainer and heat exchanger could cause serious damage to the tubes in the heat exchanger and must be avoided. The installer/user must also ensure that the quality of the water in circulation is adequate, without any dissolved gasses which can cause oxidation of steel parts within the heat exchanger(s).
The flow switch MUST NOT be used to start and stop the chiller (i.e. starting and stopping the chilled water pump). It is intended only as a safety switch. It is
recommended to interlock the auxiliary 4
contacts of the pump contactor in series with the flow switch. The coil of the pump contactor must have a voltage suppressor installed across the terminals.
The heat exchangers must not be exposed to flushing velocities or debris released during flushing. It is recommended that a suitably sized by-pass and valve arrangement be installed to allow flushing of the pipework system. The by-pass can be used during maintenance to isolate the heat exchanger without disrupting flow to other units.
Liquid systems at risk of freezing, due to low ambient temperatures, should be protected using insulation and heater tape and/or a suitable glycol solution. The liquid pumps must also be used to ensure liquid is circulated when the ambient temperature approaches freezing point. Insulation should also be installed around the heat exchanger nozzles.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
33
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION
WATER TREATMENT
The unit performance given in the Design Guide is based on a fouling factor of 0.00025 ft2/hr °F/BTU (0.44m2 ºC/kW). Dirt, scale, grease and certain types of water treatment will adversely affect the heat exchanger surfaces and therefore unit performance. Foreign matter in the water system(s) can increase the heat exchanger pressure drop, reducing the flow rate and causing potential damage to the heat exchanger tubes.
Aerated, brackish or salt water is not recommended for use in the water system(s). Johnson Controls recommends that a water treatment specialist is consulted to determine that the proposed water composition will not affect the evaporator materials of carbon steel and copper. The pH value of the water flowing through the heat exchangers must be kept between 7 and 8.5.
Glycol Solutions For unit operation with chilled liquid temperatures leaving the cooler at below 40°F (4.4°C), glycol solutions should be used to help prevent freezing. SECTION 9 SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING, gives recommended solution strength with water, as a percentage by weight, for the most common types of glycol. It is important to check glycol concentration regularly to ensure adequate concentration and avoid possible freeze-up in the cooler.
When using glycol solutions, pressure drops are higher than with water. Special care must be taken not to exceed the maximum pressure drop allowed.
OPTION FLANGES
One of two types of flanges may be fitted depending on the customer or local Pressure Vessel Code requirements. These are grooved adapter flanges or weld flanges. Grooved adapter flanges are supplied loose for field installation and weld flanges are factory fitted. Flange dimensions are to ISO 7005 - NP10 (BS 4504 - NP10).
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
REFRIGERANT RELIEF VALVE PIPING
The cooler and low side piping is protected against internal refrigerant overpressure by a 400 PSIG refrigerant relief valve.
It is recommended that each valve should be piped to the exterior of the building so that when the valve is activated the release of high pressure gas and liquid cannot be a danger or cause injury.
The size of any pipework attached to a relief valve must be of sufficient diameter so as not to cause resistance to the operation of the valve. For piping size requirements and specifications, refer to ASHRE-15 (latest edition).
If relief pipework is common to more than one valve its cross sectional area must be at least the total required by each valve. Valve types should not be mixed on a common pipe. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the exit of relief valves/vent pipe remain clear of obstructions at all times.
Unless otherwise specified by local regulations, the internal diameter depends on the length of pipe required and is given by the following formula:
D5 = 1.447 x L
Where:
D = minimum pipe internal diameter (cm)
L = length of pipe (m)
CONDENSER RELIEF VALVE
A high side pressure relief valve will normally be required. The pressure rating of the valve will be determined by the lowest pressure rated component in the high side, and local code. This valve will need to be installed in the high side piping.
The YCRL is shipped with a high pressure cutout that opens at 585 psig plus or minus 10 psig. This may need to be field changed to a lower rating depending upon the lowest rated component on the high side in the remote piping / condenser.
LD06602
Figure 8 - GROOVED ADAPTER FLANGES
34
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
PIPEWORK ARRANGEMENT
The following are suggested pipework arrangements for single unit installations, for multiple unit installations, each unit should be piped as shown in Figure 9 on page 35.
Recommendations of the Building Services Research Association.
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION
CONNECTION TYPES AND SIZES For connection sizes relevant to individual models see SECTION 9 SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING.
Cooler Connections Standard chilled and condenser cooling liquid connections are of the grooved type.
4
Figure 9 - CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM
LD06596
Isolating Valve ISOLATING VALVE - NORMALLY OPEN - Normally Open Isolating Valve ISOLATING VALVE - NORMALLY CLOSED - Normally Closed
FLOW Flow REGULATING VALVE Regulating Valve
Flow Measurement Device
FLOW MEASUREMENT DEVICE
STRAINER
Strainer
PRESSURE TAPPING Pressure Tapping
FLOW SWITCH
Flow Switch
Flanged FLANGED CONNECTION Connection
LD06597A
Figure 10 - PIPEWORK ARRANGEMENTS LEGEND
Figure 11 - COOLER CONNECTIONS
LD06601
Table 1 - CONDENSER / COOLER CONNECTIONS
Nominal Size, in.
8 6 5
OD, in.
8 5/8 6 5/8 5 9/16
A, in.
3/4 ±1/32 5/8 ±1/32 5/8 ±1/32
B, in.
7/16 ±1/32 3/8 ±1/32 3/8 ±1/32
C, in.
8.416 6.433 5.395
JOHNSON CONTROLS
35
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION
REMOTE CONDENSER PIPING
Improper design and sizing of refrigerant piping may result in loss of system efficiency and/or eventual failure of the system. Factors that must be considered in a piping design are the inter-relationships between velocity, pressure, friction, as well as, economics. Economics favor the use of the smallest possible line sizes. However, high suction and discharge line pressure drops will cause loss in capacity and increased power consumption. Another important design criterion is oil return to the compressor. The refrigerant line velocities have to be sufficiently high to carry oil up suction or hot gas risers at all operating capacities.
Johnson Controls assumes no warranty responsibility for system operation or failures due to improper piping of piping design.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
DISCHARGE LINE
LD13974
Figure 12 - EXAMPLE OF TYPICAL EFFECT OF SUCTION AND DISCHARGE LINE PRESSURE DROP ON CAPACITY AND POWER (ASHRAE)
REFRIGERANT LINE LOSSES
The pressure drops (line losses) are typically presented as a given change in the corresponding saturation temperature. The effect of line losses on the capacity and energy consumption (kW/ton) is illustrated in Figure 12 on page 36. Line sizing is a balance between pressure drop (reflected in system performance) and oil return (for system reliability).
PRESSURE DROP CONSIDERATIONS
Pressure drop calculations are determined as pressure changes associated with a change in saturation temperature of the refrigerant. Systems are typically sized for pressure losses of 2°F or less for the discharge, suction and liquid lines. This is the conventional method for sizing and is accepted practice throughout the industry (ASHRAE).
Table 2 on page 38 and Table 3 on page 39 show capacities HFC-410A at specified pressure drops for the various refrigerant lines.
System operating at 100°F saturated condensing and 40°F saturated evaporating temperature. Energy percentage is rated at kW/ton.)
REFRIGERANT LINE SIZING
Refrigerant piping systems must be designed to provide practical line sizes without excessive pressure drops, prevent compressor oil from being "trapped" in the refrigerant piping, and ensure proper flow of liquid refrigerant to the thermal expansion valve. Be sure to review DX Piping Guide (Form 050.40-ES2). Considerations should be given to:
1. Discharge line pressure drop due to refrigerant flow.
2. Discharge line refrigerant velocity for oil return.
3. Liquid line pressure drop due to refrigerant flow.
4. Liquid line pressure drop (or gain) due to vertical rise of the liquid line.
36
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
To ensure a solid column of liquid refrigerant to the expansion valve, the total liquid line pressure drop should never exceed 40 psi (276 kPa). Refrigerant vapor in the liquid line will measurably reduce valve capacity and poor system performance can be expected.
To allow adequate oil return to the compressor, discharge risers should be sized for a minimum of 1000 FPM (5.08 m/s) while the system is operating at minimum capacity to ensure oil return up the suction riser.
Chiller Below Condenser
On a system where the chiller is located below the condenser, the discharge line must be sized for both pressure drop and oil return. In some cases a double discharge riser must be installed to ensure reliable oil return at reduced loads.
Condenser Below Chiller
When the condenser is located below the chiller, the liquid line must be designed for both friction loss and static head loss due the vertical rise. The value of static head loss of 5 psi/ft (3.4 kPa/30 cm) must be added to the friction loss pressure drop in addition to all pressure drops due to driers, valves, etc.
OIL TRAPS
All horizontal discharge lines should be pitched at least 1/4 in./ft (2 cm/m) in the direction of the refrigerant flow to aid in the return of oil to the chiller. All discharge lines with a vertical rise exceeding 3 ft (0.91 m) should have a "P" trap at the bottom and top of the riser. Discharge lines with a vertical rise exceeding 25 ft (7.6 m) should be trapped every 15 ft (4.6 m).
REFRIGERANT CHARGE
The chiller is charged and shipped with a dry nitrogen holding charge. The chiller and the remote piping condenser must be evacuated and the operating charge for the chiller, remote condenser and refrigerant piping must be weighed in after all refrigerant piping is installed, leak checked, and evacuated. A minimum of 70% of the calculated complete system charge must be installed before attempting to operate a system. Final adjustment of refrigerant charge should be verified by subcooling values (see Checking Superheat And Subcooling on Page 95 in SECTION 6 COMMISSIONING).
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION
REFRIGERANT PIPING REFERENCE
R-410A Copper Line Sizing
When selecting pipe diameter and material for remote condenser piping R-410A systems such as used with YCRL chillers, it is recommended that ASTM B280 material, type "L" or "K" is used. According to ASME Standard B31.5-2006 (table 502.3.1), ASTM B280 copper does not require a derate when brazed. By comparison, ASTM B88 material does take an annealing penalty when brazing, which, in some applications, could reduce the calculated yield strength to a level below the system design.
YCRL Line Sizing Notes The YCRL chiller has a maximum design working
4
pressure of 560 psig, a mechanical high pressure cutout
to shut the unit off at 585 psig, and (the unit) is rated at
650 psig. The maximum discharge pipe diameter used
on YCRL is 2 1/8 in.
ASTM B280, type "L" pipe, 2 1/8 in. diameter has a pressure rating of 608 psi per ASME B31.5-2006 section 504.1.2, with an additional 20% increase allowed in section 502.2.3 "Ratings: Allowance for Variations from Normal Operation" for a maximum allowable pressure of 730 psi.
Type "K" pipe (thicker wall), per ASME B31.5-2006 section 504.1.2, has a rating of 725 psi before the additional 20% allowance is taken.
For more details, refer to "ASHRAE Refrigeration Handbook, Chapter 2", "Tables 2 and 3" in this IOM and YORK DX Piping Guide "Form 050.40-ES2"
1. Table capacities are in tons of refrigeration.
p = P ressure drop due to line friction, PSI per 100 feet equivalent length.
t = Change in saturation temperature corresponding to pressure drop, °F per 100 feet.
2. Line capacity for other saturation temperatures t and equivalent lengths.
( ( Line Capacity = Table Capacity X
Table Le Actual Le
X
Actual t Table t
0.55
3. Saturation temperature t (for other capacities
and equivalent lengths Le
( t = Table t X
Actual Le Table Le
X
Actual Capacity Table Capacity
1.8
( ((
JOHNSON CONTROLS
37
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Table 2 - DISCHARGE AND LIQUID LINE CAPACITIES IN TONS FOR REFRIGERANT 410A
LINE SIZE
TYPE L COPPER,
O.D.
DISCHARGE LINES (DELTA T = 1°F, DELTA P = 4.75 PSI) SATURATED SUCTION TEMPERATURE, °F DELTA P = 4.75
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
LINE SIZE
TYPE L COPPER,
O.D.
VEL. = 100 FPM
1/2
1.13
1.17
1.22
5/8
2.11
2.20
2.29
3/4
3.59
3.74
3.88
7/8
5.53
5.76
5.99
1 1/8
11.16 11.64 12.09
1 3/8
19.39 20.21 21.00
1 5/8
30.63 31.92 33.16
2 1/8
63.20 65.88 68.44
2 5/8
111.20 115.90 120.41
3 1/8
177.12 184.62 191.80
3 5/8
262.44 273.54 284.19
4 1/8
369.45 385.08 400.07
5 1/8
658.32 686.18 712.88
6 1/8 1054.47 1099.10 1141.87
STEEL
IPS SCH
3/8 80 0.81
0.84
0.88
1/2 80 1.59
1.66
1.73
3/4 80 3.59
3.74
3.88
1
80 7,02
7.32
7.60
1 1/4 80 15.03 15.67 16.28
1 1/2 80 22.89 23.86 24.79
2 40 53.16 55.41 57.57
2 1/2 40 84.56 88.14 91.57
3 40 149.44 155.76 161.82
4 40 304.02 316.88 329.21
5 40 548.97 572.20 594.46
6 40 886.76 924.29 960.25
1.26 2.36 4.02 6.19 12.50 21.72 34.30 70.78 124.53 198.36 293.90 413.75 737.26 1180.91
0.91 1.78 4.02 7.86 16.83 25.64 59.54 94.70 167.36 340.47 614.79 993.09
1.30 2.43 4.14 6.38 12.88 22.37 35.33 72.90 128.25 204.29 302.70 426.13 759.31 1216.24
0.93 1.84 4.14 8.10 17.34 26.41 61.32 97.53 172.37 350.66 633.19 1022.80
1.33 2.49 4.23 6.52 13.17 22.88 36.14 74.57 131.20 208.98 309.64 435.90 776.72 1244.13
0.95 1.88 4.23 8.28 17.74 27.01 62.73 99.77 176.32 358.70 647.71 1046.26
1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/8 1 3/8 1 5/8 2 1/8 2 5/8 3 1/8 3 5/8 4 1/8 5 1/8 6 1/8
IPS SCH 3/8 80.00 1/2 80.00 3/4 80.00 1 80.00 1 1/4 80.00 1 1/2 80.00 2 40.00 2 1/2 40.00 3 40.00 4 40.00 5 40.00 6 40.00
2.00 3.20 4.70 6.70 11.40 17.40 24.60 42.80 66.00 94.20 127.40 165.70 258.20 371.10
1.90 3.20 6.00 10.00 17.70 24.40 46.40 66.20 102.20 176.10 276.50 399.60
LIQUID LINES
DELTA T = 1°F
DELTA T = 5°F
DELTA P = 4.75
DELTA P = 23.3
4.60
10.81
8.60
20.24
14.30
33.53
22.60
52.92
45.80
106.59
79.70
185.04
125.90
291.48
260.70
601.13
459.70
1056.39
733.00
1680.52
1087.50
2491.00
1530.20
3500.91
2729.80
6228.40
4383.70
9980.43
3.40 6.70 15.10 29.50 63.30 96.60 224.20 356.50 630.00 1284.60 2313.70 3741.90
7.60 15.00 33.60 65.80 140.90 214.70 498.00 793.00 1398.40 2851.70 5137.00 8308.90
The refrigerant cycle for determining capacity is based on saturated gas leaving the evaporator and no subcooling in the condenser. Discharge superheat is 105°F. The saturated suction temperature 40°F for liquid line sizing. Multiply table capacities by the following factors for condensing temperatures other than 105°F.
38
CONDENSING TEMPERATURE, °F
80 90 100 110 120 130 140
SUCTION LINE 1.16 1.09 1.03 0.97 0.9 0.83 0.76
DISCHARGE LINE
0.81 0.89 0.96 1.03 1.1 1.16 1.19
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION
Table 3 - MINIMUM REFRIGERATION CAPACITY IN TONS FOR OIL ENTRAINMENT UP HOT GAS RISERS (TYPE L COPPER TUBING)
REFRIGERANT
SATURATION TEMP. °F
DISCHARGE GAS TEMP.
°F
1/2
5/8 0.233
PIPE O.D., IN.
3/4
7/8
AREA, IN2
0.348
0.484
1 1/8 0.825
1 3/8 1.256
110
0.30
0.54
0.88
1.33
2.60
4.40
80
140
0.28
0.50
0.82
1.24
2.41
4.08
170
0.25
0.45
0.74
1.11
2.17
3.67
120
0.30
0.54
0.90
1.36
2.64
4.47
90
150
0.28
0.50
0.83
1.25
2.43
4.11
180
0.25
0.45
0.75
1.13
2.21
3.73
130
0.31
0.55
0.91
1.37
2.67
4.51
410A
100
160 190
0.27 0.26
0.48
0.80
0.46
0.76
1.20 1.15
2.34 2.23
3.96 3.77
4
140
0.31
0.55
0.91
1.37
2.67
4.52
110
170
0.27
0.49
0.80
1.21
2.36
3.99
200
0.26
0.46
0.76
1.15
2.24
3.79
150
0.30
0.54
0.90
1.36
2.64
4.47
120
180
0.27
0.48
0.80
1.21
2.35
3.98
210
0.26
0.46
0.76
1.15
2.23
3.78
REFRIGERANT
SATURATION TEMP. °F
DISCHARGE GAS TEMP.
°F
410A
110
80
140
170
120
90
150
180
130
100
160
190
140
110
170
200
150
120
180
210
1 5/8
1.780 6.80 6.31 5.67 6.91 6.36 5.77 6.98 6.13 5.84 6.99 6.16 5.86 6.91 6.15 5.84
Refrigeration capacity in tons is based on a saturated suction temperature of 20°F with 15°F superheat at the indicated saturated condensing temperature with 15°F subcooling. The saturated condensing and suction conditions are referenced to the dewpoint for R-407C. For other saturated suction temperatures with 15°F superheat, use correction factors to the capacity given in the table below.
2 1/8
3.094 13.56 12.60 11.32 13.80 12.69 11.52 13.93 12.23 11.65 13.95 12.30 11.70 13.80 12.28 11.66
PIPE O.D., IN.
2 5/8
3 1/8
AREA, IN2
4.770
6.812
23.30
36.38
21.64
33.79
19.44
30.35
23.70
37.00
21.79
34.02
19.79
30.89
23.93
37.36
21.01
32.79
20.01
31.24
23.96
37.41
21.13
32.98
20.10
31.37
23.70
37.00
21.09
32.92
20.03
31.27
3 5/8
9.213 53.06 49.28 44.27 53.96 49.62 45.05 54.49 47.83 45.56 54.56 48.11 45.76 53.97 48.02 45.61
4 1/8
11.970 73.60 68.36 61.41 74.85 68.83 62.49 75.59 66.35 63.19 75.69 66.73 63.47 74.86 66.61 63.27
REFRIGERANT 410A
SATURATED SUCTION TEMPERATURE, °F
-40
-20
0
40
0.91
0.94
0.97
1.02
JOHNSON CONTROLS
39
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
The following connection recommendations are intended to ensure safe and satisfactory operation of the unit. Failure to follow these recommendations could cause harm to persons, or damage to the unit, and may invalidate the warranty.
No additional controls (relays, etc.) should be mounted in the control panel. Power and control wiring not connected to the control panel should not be run through the control panel. If these precautions are not followed it could lead to a risk of electrocution. In addition, electrical noise could cause malfunctions or damage the unit and its controls.
Remote Emergency Stop Device A remote emergency stop device may be wired into the unit. This device should be rated at 8 A, 230 V.
The emergency stop device should be wired into terminals L and 5 of CTB2.
Chilled Liquid Pump (CLP) (Evaporator Pump Start Contacts) Terminals 23 and 24 on CTB1 close to start the chilled liquid pump. These terminals can be used as a master start/stop for the pump in conjunction with the daily start/stop schedule. If no schedule is set, and the customer has master control of the pump, the terminals must be used to override the customer master start/stop so that the unit can start the pump in the event of a low liquid temperature condition.
System Run Contacts Terminals 25 and 26 on CTB2 close to indicate that System 1 is running. Terminals 27 and 28 on CTB2 close to indicate System 2 is running. These terminals may be used to start the cooling liquid pump(s) for the condenser.
System Alarm (SA) (System Alarm Contacts) Terminals 29 and 30 (system 1) and 31 and 32 (system 2) on CTB2 close to indicate an alarm condition whenever a system locks out, or there is a power failure.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
FIELD WIRING
All field wiring must comply with the National Electric Code and all applicable local codes. YORK liquid chiller units are factory wired for optimum reliability. Therefore the unit controls must not be modified without expressed written consent by Johnson Controls. The use of a simple switch or timer from a remote point is permitted; but it must be connected to the YORK unit panel at points expressly indicated for that purpose.
Copper power wiring only should be used for supplying power to the chiller. This is recommended to avoid safety and reliability issues resulting from connection failure at the power connections to the chiller. Aluminum wiring is not recommended due to thermal characteristics that may cause loose terminations resulting from the contraction and expansion of the wiring. Aluminum oxide may also buildup at the termination causing hot spots and eventual failure. If aluminum wiring is used to supply power to the chiller, AL-CU compression fittings should be used to transition from aluminum to copper. This transition should be done in an external box separate to the power panel. Copper conductors can then be run from the box to the chiller.
A 120-1-60, 15 A source must be supplied for the control panel through a fused disconnect when a control panel transformer (optional) is not provided (refer to Use 1/2" or better grade 80 chain).
See unit wiring diagrams for field and power wiring connections, chilled water pump starter contacts, alarm contacts, compressor run status contacts, PWM input, and load limit input. See SECTION 8 UNIT OPERATION for a detailed description of operation concerning aforementioned contacts and inputs.
YCRL Connection Sizes
Piping connection sizes are provided in Table 4 on page 41. These sizes indicate the connection size that is provided on the chiller where the remote piping connects.
The connection sizes should not be used as a guide for sizing remote piping, since sizing of the remote piping will vary to ensure oil return and limit pressure drop.
40
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Table 4 - YCRL CONNECTION LINE SIZES
UNIT SIZE (60HZ) 0064HE 0074HE 0084HE 0096HE 0118HE 0126HE 0156HE 0177SE 0198SE
LIQUID LINE SYSTEM 1, IN.
7/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 1/8
LIQUID LINE SYSTEM 2, IN.
7/8 7/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 1/8
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION
DISCHARGE LINE SYSTEM 1, IN. 1 3/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 3/8 1 5/8 2 1/8 2 1/8 2 1/8 2 1/8
DISCHARGE LINE SYSTEM 2, IN. 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 5/8 1 3/8 1 5/8 2 1/8 2 1/8 2 1/8 2 1/8
YCRL Chiller Charge Capability
Table 5 on page 41 provides a refrigerant charge capability for each refrigerant system in the chiller. This information is valuable when calculating the total charge needed for each of the refrigerant systems. Simply add the system charge capability to the calculated charge of all the field piping and remote condenser in the circuit to compute the total approximate charge required for each refrigerant system in the chiller.
Table 5 - YCRL CHILLER CHARGES
MODEL (60 HZ)
TOTAL HFC-410A CHARGE (LB)
PER SYSTEM (LB)
0064HE
34
17
0074HE
40
20
0084HE
82
41
0096HE
106
53
0118HE
90
45
0126HE
126
63
0156HE
126
63
0177SE
122
63/59
0198SE
126
63
Note: Charge for remote condenser and interconnecting piping must be calculated separately.
CONTROL PANEL WIRING
All wiring to the control panel terminal block (CTBI) (nominal 30 VDC) must be run in screened cable, with the screen earthed at the panel end only. Run screened cable separately from mains cable to avoid electrical noise pick-up.
The voltage free contacts connected to CTB1 must be 4
suitable for 30 VDC (gold contacts recommended). If the voltage free contacts form part of a relay or contactor, the coil of the device must be suppressed using a standard R/C suppressor. The above precautions must be taken to avoid electrical noise which could cause a malfunction or damage to the unit and its controls.
The length of cable to these terminals must not exceed 24 ft (7.5 m).
Flow Switch (SF) A chilled liquid flow switch of suitable type must be connected to terminals 13 and 14 to provide adequate protection against loss of liquid flow.
After connection, do not switch on mains power to the unit until it has been commissioned by Johnson Controls Authorized personnel. Some internal components are live when mains is switched ON.
The unit ON/OFF rocker switch on the front of the control panel has been set in the OFF position at the factory.
This switch MUST remain in the OFF position until the unit is commissioned by Johnson Controls Authorized personnel. If the switch is set to the ON position before commissioning then it must be reported to Johnson Controls, otherwise the warranty may be invalidated.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
41
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION
Remote Start/Stop Remote Start and Stop is accomplished by a contact placed between Terminals 13 and 51 on the CTBl terminal strip. If this function is not utilized, the terminals must be jumpered for the chiller to run.
POWER WIRING
All electrical wiring should be carried out in accordance with local regulations. Route properly sized cables to cable entries on the bottom of the control panel. For wiring specifications, see SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA.
In accordance with National Electric Code (NEC) it is the responsibility of the user to install overcurrent protection devices between the supply conductors and the power supply terminals on the unit.
To ensure that no eddy currents are set up in the metal gland plate the cables forming each 3-phase power supply must enter via the same hole in the gland plate. If separate entries for each cable forming the 3-phase supplies are used, the metal gland plate must be replaced by a non-metallic gland plate, with due regard given to sealing the panel to NEMA 1.
All sources of supply to the unit must be taken via a common point of isolation (not supplied by Johnson Controls).
Units with Single-Point Power Supply Wiring Models require one field provided 200 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz; 230 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz; 380 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz; 460 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz; 575 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz, ground supply to the unit with circuit protection.
Connect the 3-phase supply to the terminal block or Non-fused Disconnect Switch located in the common input section using the wire sizes detailed in SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA.
Connect the earth wire ground to the main protective earth terminal in the common input section.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Units with Multi Point Power Supply Wiring Units require two field provided 200 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz; 230 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz; 380 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz; 460 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz; 575 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz, supplies with circuit protection and a separate control supply with circuit protection (200 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz; 230 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz; 380 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz; 460 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz; 575 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz, +ground).
Connect each of the 3-phase supplies to the door interlocked circuit breakers located in the power sections, using the wire sizes detailed in SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA.
Connect each of the earth grounds to the main protective earth ground terminals in the power sections.
Connect the control supply to the door interlocked emergency stop device located in the common input section, using the wire sizes detailed in SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA.
Connect the earth ground to the main protective earth terminal in the common input section.
Control Transformer Primary Voltage Tappings It is important to check that the correct primary tapping has been used on the control transformer:
· With the supply to the unit isolated remove the lid to the transformer box.
· Check that the tapping used conforms to the site supply voltage. The two tappings are 342 V to 424 V and 360 V to 440 V.
COMPRESSOR HEATERS
Compressor heaters are standard. If power is OFF more than two hours, the crankcase heaters must be energized for 18 to 24 hours prior to restarting a compressor. This will ensured that liquid slugging and oil dilution does not damage the compressors on start.
RELIEF VALVES
Relief valves are located in the low pressure side of the piping. High side relief valve pressure setting is determined by the lowest pressure rated component in the highside piping and local code. The high side relief valve is field installed.
42
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Not all of the systems need a high side relief valve. Systems with a compressor with a built-in relief valve do not need an additional relief valve installed in the discharge pipe. The Bitzer GSD8 compressor has an internal relief valve, so there is no high side relief valve in the discharge pipe.
HIGH PRESSURE CUTOUT
On 60 Hz chillers, a high pressure cutout is installed in the discharge piping of each system. The cutout opens at 585 psi ±10 psig and automatically closes at 440 psig ±25 psig.
On 50 Hz chillers, all models will utilize a manual reset high pressure cutout of 503 psig (34.7 barg). On chillers with compressors exceeding a swept volume of 25 L/s, a second tool reset cutout is installed with a cutout of 532 psig (36.7 barg). These cutouts conform to relevant requirements of Pressure Equipment Directive PD 97/23/EC.
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION
4
JOHNSON CONTROLS
43
SECTION 4 INSTALLATION
CONTROL WIRING
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
13 20 13 51 13 14 13 21
CTB1
PWM/LL2 REMOTE START/STOP
FLOW SW
LOAD LIMIT INPUT
LD14516
*
It is possible that multiple sources of power can be supplying the unit power panel. To prevent serious injury or death, the technician should verify that NO LETHAL VOLTAGES are present inside the panel AFTER disconnecting power, PRIOR to working on equipment.
Figure 13 - CONTROL WIRING
44
* Factory wired with optional transformer.
LD07730A
The unit evaporator heater uses 120 VAC. Disconnecting 120 VAC power from the unit, at or below freezing temperatures, can result in damage to the evaporator and unit as a result of the chilled liquid freezing.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS (ENGLISH AND SI)
Table 6 - TEMPERATURES AND FLOWS
YCRL MODEL NUMBER
0064 0074 0084 0096 0118 0126 0156 0177 0198
DESIGN PARAMETERS HIGH EFFICIENCY (HE) ENGLISH
EVAPORATOR FLOW (GPM)
LEAVING EVAP. WATER TEMP. (°F)
MIN SAT. DISCH. TEMP. (°F)
MAX. SAT DISCH
TEMP (°F)
MIN
MAX
MIN1
MAX2
MIN
MAX
100
355
40
50
80
130
140
625
40
50
80
130
140
625
40
50
80
130
150
625
40
50
80
130
140
625
40
50
80
130
200
650
40
50
80
130
200
650
40
50
80
130
200
650
40
50
80
130
200
650
40
50
80
130
EQUIPMENT ROOM TEMP. (°F)
MIN
MAX
40
115
40
115
40
115
40
115
40
115
40
115
40
115
40
115
40
115
DESIGN PARAMETERS HIGH EFFICIENCY (HE) SI
5
YCRL MODEL NUMBER
EVAPORATOR FLOW (L/S)
MIN
MAX
LEAVING EVAP. WATER TEMP. (°C)
MIN1
MAX2
MIN SAT. DISCH. TEMP. (°C)
MIN
MAX. SAT DISCH.
TEMP (°C)
MAX
EQUIPMENT ROOM TEMP. (°C)
MIN
MAX
0064
6.3
22.4
4.4
10
26.7
54
4.4
46
0074
8.8
39.4
4.4
10
26.7
54
4.4
46
0084
8.8
39.4
4.4
10
26.7
54
4.4
46
0096
9.5
39.4
4.4
10
26.7
54
4.4
46
0118
8.8
39.4
4.4
10
26.7
54
4.4
46
0126
12.6
41
4.4
10
26.7
54
4.4
46
0156
12.6
41
4.4
10
26.7
54
4.4
46
0177
12.6
41
4.4
10
26.7
54
4.4
46
0198
12.6
41
4.4
10
26.7
54
4.4
46
NOTES: 1. For leaving brine temperature below 40°F (4.4°C), contact the nearest Johnson Controls Office for application requirements. 2. For leaving water temperature higher than 50°F (10°C), contact the nearest Johnson Controls Office for application guidelines.
Excessive flow will cause damage to the cooler. Do not exceed max. cooler flow. Special care should be taken when multiple chillers are fed by a single pump.
Voltage Limitations
The following voltage limitations are absolute and operation beyond these limitations may cause serious damage to the compressor.
Table 7 - VOLTAGE LIMITATIONS
UNIT POWER 200-3-60 230-3-60 380-3-60 460-3-60 575-3-60
MIN. 180 207 355 414 517
MAX. 220 253 415 506 633
JOHNSON CONTROLS
45
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
PRESSURE DROP CHARTS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Pressure Drop (ft H2O)
100.0 10.0
YCRL Evaporator Pressure Drop (English Units)
B A
D
C
1.0 10
100 Water Flow Rate (GPM)
1000
YCRL Model Number 0064HE
0074HE, 0084HE, 0118HE, 0096HE
0126HE, 0156HE, 0177SE, 198SE
Evap A B C D
1000.0 100.0 10.0
YCRL Evaporator Pressure Drop (SI Units)
B A
D
C
Pressure Drop (kPa)
1.0 1.0
10.0 Water Flow Rate (l/s)
100.0
Figure 14 - EVAPORATOR WATER PRESSURE DROP CURVES (ENGLISH AND SI)
46
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
ETHYLENE AND PROPOLYNE GLYCOL CORRECTION FACTORS
Evaporator Pressure Drop
When using evaporator pressure drop to determine flow, error may result due to actual pressure drops that are below the published data. In all cases, the published values are worst case values. Errors of 10% to 25% below published values are not uncommon due to manufacturing differences. When attempting to operate with flow near the high end of the pressure drop curve, always use a flowmeter to avoid excessive flow through the evaporator, which will cause damage and premature failure.
Table 8 on page 47 lists glycol correction factors that should be used in conjunction with pressure drops. Pressure drop will increase at a given flow rate as the glycol concentration is increased.
Table 8 - ETHYLENE AND PROPOLYNE GLYCOL CORRECTION FACTORS
ETHYLENE GLYCOL
% WEIGHT
TONS
COMPR KW
GPM
PRESS FREEZE DROP PT
10 0.993 1.002 1.029 1.095
26
20
0.98 1.004 1.04 1.191
18
30 0.964 1.007 1.055 1.302
7
40 0.945 1.009 1.071 1.435
-8
50
0.922 1.013 1.091 1.599
-29
% WEIGHT
10 20 30 40 50
PROPYLENE GLYCOL
TONS
COMPR KW
GPM
PRESS DROP
0.985 1.002 1.003 1.078
0.968 1.005 1.000 1.157
0.937 1.008 0.992 1.266
0.898 1.012 0.982 1.414
0.862 1.019 0.985 1.605
FREEZE PT 26 19 9 -6 -28
Table 9 - RECOMMENDED GLYCOL SOLUTION STRENGTHS
ETHYLENE GLYCOL LCHLT °C
6 4
PROPYLENE GLYCOL
CONCENTRATION % W/W
5
12
CONCENTRATION % W/W
5 13
2
18
20
0
23
25
-2
28
30
-4
32
34
-6
35
38
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
Pressure drop across the evaporator should only be used as a guide for setting up flow. When very accurate flows need to be measured, use a flowmeter. When gauges are used to measure pressure drop and calculate flow, always use a single gauge to measure the pressure drop at both inlet and outlet of the evaporator to avoid introducing more error into the measurement resulting from the use of two gauges.
The cooler design allows for an increase in pressure drop of up to 15% above the design value given. Debris in the water may also cause additional pressure drop.
When using glycol solutions, pressure
drops are higher than with water. Spe-
cial care must be taken not to exceed the maximum allowed.
5
ETHYLENE GLYCOL
A C
B
PROPYLENE GLYCOL
A C
A = Correction Factor C = Concentration %
B
LD06934
B = Temperature Through Cooler
Figure 15 - GLYCOL SOLUTION STRENGTHS
JOHNSON CONTROLS
47
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
PHYSICAL DATA - STANDARD AND HIGH EFFICIENCY - ENGLISH
YCRL MODEL 0064HE 0074HE 0084HE 0096HE 0118HE 0126HE 0156HE 0177SE 0198SE
GENERAL UNIT DATA
NOMINAL UNIT CAPACITY (TON)
NUMBER OF INDEPENDENT REFRIGERANT
CIRCUITS
OIL CHARGE, CKT. 1/CKT. 2, (GAL)
55.8 2
2.2/2.2
SHIPPING (LB)
2883
64.6 2
2.5/2.2 3261
73.0 2
2.5/2.5 3439
85.1 2
3.3/3.3 3753
101.7 2
3.3/3.1 3705
110.5 2
3.7/3.7 4587
129.7 2
4.7/4.7 4989
170.5 2
4.7/4.7 4418
203.2 2
4.7/4.7 4773
OPERATING (LB) 3090 3547 3725
4195
3991
5030
5432
4773
5128
COMPRESSORS, SCROLL
QUANTITY PER CHILLER
NOMINAL SIZE CKT. 1/ CKT. 2
4
15-15 / 15-15
EVAPORATOR
WATER VOLUME (GAL)
MAXIMUM WATER SIDE PRESSURE
(PSIG)
MAXIMUM REFRIGERANT SIDE PRESSURE
(PSIG)
DIA. X LENGTH (IN. X FT)
WATER NOZZLE CONNECTION SIZE,
(IN.)
37.3 150
450 13 X 8
6
4 20-20 / 15-15
59.8 150
450
16 X 8 8
4
6
4
6
6
5
6
20-20 / 15-15-15/ 32-32 / 20-20-20 / 25-25-25 / 32-32-32 / 32-32-32 / 20-20 15-15-15 25-25 20-20-20 25-25-25 32-32 32-32-32
59.8
57.6
59.8
77
77
77
77
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
450
450
450
450
450
450
450
16 X 8 15 X 10 16 X 8 17 X 10 17 X 10 17 X 10 17 X 10
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
48
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
JOHNSON CONTROLS
49
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
ELECTRICAL DATA - SINGLE POINT
HIGH EFFICIENCY without EXTERNAL COMPRESSOR OVERLOADS (CONT'D)
YCRL
MINIMUM
VOLT HZ
CIRCUIT AMPS
MCA
208 60
237
230 60
237
0064HE 380 60
153
460 60
114
575 60
101
208 60
278
230 60
278
0074HE 380 60
158
460 60
122
575 60
103
208 60
314
230 60
314
0084HE 380 60
162
460 60
129
575 60
105
208 60
349
230 60
349
0096HE 380 60
225
460 60
168
575 60
148
208 60
425
230 60
425
0118HE 380 60
265
460 60
208
575 60
175
208 60
462
230 60
462
0126HE 380 60
239
460 60
190
575 60
154
208 60
557
230 60
557
0156HE 380 60
341
460 60
268
575 60
201
380 60
358
0177SE 460 60
288
575 60
261
380 60
435
0198SE 460 60
343
575 60
310
* Contact Johnson Controls
MIN N/F DISC SW
MDSW
400 400 200 150 150 400 400 200 150 150 400 400 200 150 150 400 400 250 200 200 600 600 400 250 200 600 600 400 250 200 800 800 400 400 250 400 400 400 600 400 400
LUGS PER PHASE
MIN DUAL MAX DUAL
ELEM
ELEM CIRCUIT BREAKER LUG SIZE TERMINAL BLOCK LUG SIZE
FUSE
FUSE
(OPT)
(STD)
QTY/Ø
LUG INFO
QTY/Ø
LUG INFO
300
300
1
250500 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
300
300
1
250500 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
175
175
1
#4300 kcm
1
#10300 kcm
125
125
1
#24/0 AWG
1
#10300 kcm
110
110
1
#24/0 AWG
1
#10300 kcm
300
350
1
250500 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
300
350
1
250500 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
175
175
1
#4300 kcm
1
#10300 kcm
150
150
1
#24/0 AWG
1
#10300 kcm
110
125
1
#24/0 AWG
1
#10300 kcm
350
350
1
250500 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
350
350
1
250500 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
175
200
1
#4300 kcm
1
#10300 kcm
150
150
1
#24/0 AWG
1
#10300 kcm
125
125
1
#24/0 AWG
1
#10300 kcm
400
400
1
250500 kcm
2
#10300 kcm
400
400
1
250500 kcm
2
#10300 kcm
250
250
1
#6350 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
175
175
1
#4300 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
175
175
1
#6350 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
500
500
2
250500 kcm
2
#10300 kcm
500
500
2
250500 kcm
2
#10300 kcm
300
300
1
250500 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
225
250
1
#6350 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
200
200
1
#6350 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
500
500
2
250500 kcm
2
#10300 kcm
500
500
2
250500 kcm
2
#10300 kcm
250
250
1
#6350 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
200
200
1
#6350 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
175
175
1
#6350 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
600
600
2
250500 kcm
2
#4500 kcm
600
600
2
250500 kcm
2
#4500 kcm
400
400
1
250500 kcm
2
#10300 kcm
300
300
1
250500 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
225
225
1
250500 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
400
400
*
*
2
#10300 kcm
300
300
1
250500 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
300
300
1
#6AWG350 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
500
500
2
250500 kcm
2
#10300 kcm
350
350
2
#3/0250 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
350
350
1
250500 kcm
1
#4500 kcm
50
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
HIGH EFFICIENCY without EXTERNAL COMPRESSOR OVERLOADS (CONT'D)
SYSTEM # 1
SYSTEM # 2
MODEL YCRL
COMPR 1
COMPR 2
COMPR 3
COMPR 1
COMPR 2
COMPR 3
RLA
LRA
RLA
LRA
RLA
LRA
RLA
LRA
RLA
LRA
RLA
LRA
55.8
425
55.8
425
-
-
55.8
425
55.8
425
-
-
55.8
425
55.8
425
-
-
55.8
425
55.8
425
-
-
0064HE 36.0
239
36.0
239
-
-
36.0
239
36.0
239
-
-
26.9
187
26.9
187
-
-
26.9
187
26.9
187
-
-
23.7
148
23.7
148
-
-
23.7
148
23.7
148
-
-
73.9
505
73.9
505
-
-
55.8
425
55.8
425
-
-
73.9
505
73.9
505
-
-
55.8
425
55.8
425
-
-
0074HE 38.2
290
38.2
290
-
-
36.0
239
36.0
239
-
-
30.4
225
30.4
225
-
-
26.9
187
26.9
187
-
-
24.6
180
24.6
180
-
-
23.7
148
23.7
148
-
-
73.9
505
73.9
505
-
-
73.9
505
73.9
505
-
-
73.9
505
73.9
505
-
-
73.9
505
73.9
505
-
-
0084HE 38.2
290
38.2
290
-
-
38.2
290
38.2
290
-
-
30.4
225
30.4
225
-
-
30.4
225
30.4
225
-
-
24.6
180
24.6
180
-
109.6
599
109.6
599
-
-
24.6
180
24.6
180
-
-
89.1
500
89.1
500
-
-
5
109.6
599
109.6
599
-
-
89.1
500
89.1
500
-
-
0118HE 69.2
358
69.2
358
-
-
54.5
305
54.5
305
-
-
54.5
310
54.5
310
-
-
42.9
250
42.9
250
-
-
49.4
239
49.4
239
-
-
32.1
198
32.1
198
-
-
55.8
425
55.8
425
55.8
425
55.8
425
55.8
425
55.8
425
55.8
425
55.8
425
55.8
425
55.8
425
55.8
425
55.8
425
0096HE 36.0
239
36.0
239
36.0
239
36.0
239
36.0
239
36.0
239
26.9
187
26.9
187
26.9
187
26.9
187
26.9
187
26.9
187
23.7
148
23.7
148
23.7
148
23.7
148
23.7
148
23.7
148
73.9
505
73.9
505
73.9
505
73.9
505
73.9
505
73.9
505
73.9
505
73.9
505
73.9
505
73.9
505
73.9
505
73.9
505
0126HE 38.2
290
38.2
290
38.2
290
38.2
290
38.2
290
38.2
290
30.4
225
30.4
225
30.4
225
30.4
225
30.4
225
30.4
225
24.6
180
24.6
180
24.6
180
24.6
180
24.6
180
24.6
180
89.1
500
89.1
500
89.1
500
89.1
500
89.1
500
89.1
500
89.1
500
89.1
500
89.1
500
89.1
500
89.1
500
89.1
500
0156HE 54.5
305
54.5
305
54.5
305
54.5
305
54.5
305
54.5
305
42.9
250
42.9
250
42.9
250
42.9
250
42.9
250
42.9
250
32.1
198
32.1
198
32.1
198
32.1
198
32.1
198
32.1
198
69.2
358
69.2
358
69.2
358
69.2
358
69.2
358
-
-
0177SE 54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
-
-
49.4
239
49.4
239
49.4
239
49.4
239
49.4
239
-
-
69.2
358
69.2
358
69.2
358
69.2
358
69.2
358
69.2
358
0198SE 54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
49.4
239
49.4
239
49.4
239
49.4
239
49.4
239
49.4
239
JOHNSON CONTROLS
51
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
ELECTRICAL DATA - DUAL POINT
HIGH EFFICIENCY without EXTERNAL COMPRESSOR OVERLOADS (CONTD)
YCRL VOLT
208 230 0064HE 380 460 575 208 230 0074HE 380 460 575 208 230 0084HE 380 460 575 208 230 0118HE 380 460 575 208 230 0096HE 380 460 575 208 230 0126HE 380 460 575 208 230 0156HE 380 460 575
230
380 0177SE
460
575
230
380 0198SE
460
575
SYSTEM 1 WIRING
SYSTEM 2 WIRING
HZ
MINIMUM CIRCUIT
AMPS
MIN N/F DISC SW
MIN DUAL MAX DUAL
ELEM
ELEM
FUSE AND FUSE AND
MIN CB MAX CB
MINIMUM CIRCUIT
AMPS
MIN N/F DISC SW
MIN DUAL MAX DUAL
ELEM FUSE ELEM FUSE
AND MIN AND MAX
CB
CB
60
126
150
150
175
126
150
150
175
60
126
150
150
175
126
150
150
175
60
81
100
90
110
81
100
90
110
60
61
100
70
80
61
100
70
80
60
53
60
60
70
53
60
60
70
60
166
200
200
225
126
150
150
175
60
166
200
200
225
126
150
150
175
60
86
100
100
110
81
100
90
110
60
68
100
80
90
61
100
70
80
60
55
60
70
70
53
60
60
70
60
166
200
200
225
166
200
200
225
60
166
200
200
225
166
200
200
225
60
86
100
100
110
86
100
100
110
60
68
100
80
90
68
100
80
90
60
55
60
70
70
55
60
70
70
60
247
400
300
350
200
250
225
250
60
247
400
300
350
200
250
225
250
60
156
200
175
200
123
150
150
175
60
123
150
150
175
97
100
110
125
60
111
150
125
150
72
100
90
100
60
181
200
200
225
181
200
200
225
60
181
200
200
225
181
200
200
225
60
117
150
150
150
117
150
150
150
60
87
100
100
110
87
100
100
110
60
77
100
90
100
77
100
90
100
60
240
400
300
300
240
400
300
300
60
240
400
300
300
240
400
300
300
60
124
150
150
150
124
150
150
150
60
99
150
110
125
99
150
110
125
60
80
100
90
100
80
100
90
100
60
290
400
350
350
290
400
350
350
60
290
400
350
350
290
400
350
350
60
177
200
200
225
177
200
200
225
60
139
150
175
175
139
150
175
175
60
104
150
125
125
104
150
125
125
60
345
400
400
450
239
250
300
300
60
209
250
250
250
145
150
175
200
60
173
200
200
225
119
150
150
150
60
138
150
150
175
96
100
110
125
60
345
400
400
450
345
400
400
450
60
209
250
250
250
209
250
250
250
60
173
200
200
225
173
200
200
225
60
138
150
150
175
138
150
150
175
52
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
HIGH EFFICIENCY without EXTERNAL COMPRESSOR OVERLOADS (CONTD)
SYSTEM 1 CIRCUIT
SYSTEM # 1
SYSTEM 2 CIRCUIT
SYSTEM # 2
YCRL VOLT BREAKER LUG SIZE
COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 BREAKER LUG SIZE COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3
QTY/Ø
LUG INFO
RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY/Ø
LUG INFO
RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA
208 1
#6350 kcmil 55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0
1
#6350 kcmil 55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0
230 1
#6350 kcmil 55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0
1
#6350 kcmil 55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0
0064HE 380 1
#141/0 AWG 36.0 239.0 36.0 239.0
1
#141/0 AWG 36.0 239.0 36.0 239.0
460 1
#141/0 AWG 26.9 187.0 26.9 187.0
1
#141/0 AWG 26.9 187.0 26.9 187.0
575 1
#141/0 AWG 23.7 148.0 23.7 148.0
1
#141/0 AWG 23.7 148.0 23.7 148.0
208 1
#6350 kcmil 73.9 505.0 73.9 505.0
1
#6350 kcmil 55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0
230 1
#6350 kcmil 73.9 505.0 73.9 505.0
1
#6350 kcmil 55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0
0074HE 380 1
#24/0 AWG
38.2 290.0 38.2 290.0
1
#141/0 AWG 36.0 239.0 36.0 239.0
460 1
#141/0 AWG 30.4 225.0 30.4 225.0
1
#141/0 AWG 26.9 187.0 26.9 187.0
575 1
#141/0 AWG 24.6 180.0 24.6 180.0
1
#141/0 AWG 23.7 148.0 23.7 148.0
208 1
#6350 kcmil 73.9 505.0 73.9 505.0
1
#6350 kcmil 73.9 505.0 73.9 505.0
230 1
#6350 kcmil 73.9 505.0 73.9 505.0
1
#6350 kcmil 73.9 505.0 73.9 505.0
0084HE 380 1
#24/0 AWG
38.2 290.0 38.2 290.0
1
#24/0 AWG 38.2 290.0 38.2 290.0
460 1
#141/0 AWG 30.4 225.0 30.4 225.0
1
#141/0 AWG 30.4 225.0 30.4 225.0
575 1
#141/0 AWG 24.6 180.0 24.6 180.0
1
#141/0 AWG 24.6 180.0 24.6 180.0
208 1 230 1
250300 kcmil 250300 kcmil
55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0 1 55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0 1
#6350 kcmil #6350 kcmil
55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0 55.8 425.0
5
0096HE 380 1
#6350 kcmil 36.0 239.0 36.0 239.0 36.0 239.0 1
#6350 kcmil 36.0 239.0 36.0 239.0 36.0 239.0
460 1
#6350 kcmil 26.9 187.0 26.9 187.0 26.9 187.0 1
#24/0 AWG 26.9 187.0 26.9 187.0 26.9 187.0
575 1
#24/0 AWG
23.7 148.0 23.7 148.0 23.7 148.0 1
#141/0 AWG 23.7 148.0 23.7 148.0 23.7 148.0
208 1
#6350 kcmil 109.6 599.0 109.6 599.0
1
#6350 kcmil 89.1 500.0 89.1 500.0
230 1
#6350 kcmil 109.6 599.0 109.6 599.0
1
#6350 kcmil 89.1 500.0 89.1 500.0
0118HE 380 1
#24/0 AWG
69.2 358.0 69.2 358.0
1
#24/0 AWG 54.5 305.0 54.5 305.0
460 1
#141/0 AWG 54.5 310.0 54.5 310.0
1
#141/0 AWG 42.9 250.0 42.9 250.0
575 1
#141/0 AWG 49.4 239.0 49.4 239.0
1
#141/0 AWG 32.1 198.0 32.1 198.0
208 1
250300 kcmil 73.9 505.0 73.9 505.0 73.9 505.0 1
250300 kcmil 73.9 505.0 73.9 505.0 73.9 505.0
230 1
250300 kcmil 73.9 505.0 73.9 505.0 73.9 505.0 1
250300 kcmil 73.9 505.0 73.9 505.0 73.9 505.0
0126HE 380 1
#24/0 AWG
38.2 290.0 38.2 290.0 38.2 290.0 1
#24/0 AWG 38.2 290.0 38.2 290.0 38.2 290.0
460 1
#24/0 AWG
30.4 225.0 30.4 225.0 30.4 225.0 1
#24/0 AWG 30.4 225.0 30.4 225.0 30.4 225.0
575 1
#141/0 AWG 24.6 180.0 24.6 180.0 24.6 180.0 1
#141/0 AWG 24.6 180.0 24.6 180.0 24.6 180.0
208 1
250300 kcmil 89.1 500.0 89.1 500.0 89.1 500.0 1
250300kcmil 89.1 500.0 89.1 500.0 89.1 500.0
230 1
250300 kcmil 89.1 500.0 89.1 500.0 89.1 500.0 1
250300 kcmil 89.1 500.0 89.1 500.0 89.1 500.0
0156HE 380 1
#6350 kcmil 54.5 305.0 54.5 305.0 54.5 305.0 1
#6350 kcmil 54.5 305.0 54.5 305.0 54.5 305.0
460 1
#6350 kcmil 42.9 250.0 42.9 250.0 42.9 250.0 1
#6350 kcmil 42.9 250.0 42.9 250.0 42.9 250.0
575 1
#24/0 AWG
32.1 198.0 32.1 198.0 32.1 198.0 1
#24/0 AWG 32.1 198.0 32.1 198.0 32.1 198.0
(2) #3/0 AWG250
230 1
106.2 578.4 106.2 578.4 106.2 578.4 1 (1) 250500 kcmil 106.2 578.4 106.2 578.4
kcmil
380 1 0177SE
460 1
(1) #4 AWG300 kcmil
64.3 355.4 64.3 355.4 64.3 355.4
1
(1) #4 AWG300 kcmil
53.1 290.0 53.1 290.0 53.1 290.0
1
(1) #6 AWG350 kcmil
64.3 355.4 64.3 355.4
(1) #24/0 AWG 53.1 290 53.1 290
575 1
(1) #24/0 AWG 42.5 254.6 42.5 254.6 42.5 254.6 1 (1) #24/0 AWG 42.5 254.6 42.5 254.6
230 1
380 1 0198SE
460 1
575 1
(1) 250500 kcmil 106.2 578.4 106.2 578.4 106.2 578.4 1
(1) #6 AWG350 kcmil
64.3 355.4 64.3 355.4 64.3 355.4
1
(1) #4 AWG300 kcmil
53.1 290 53.1 290 53.1 290
1
(1) #24/0 AWG 42.5 254.6 42.5 254.6 42.5 254.6 1
(1) 250500 kcmil 106.2 578.4 106.2 578.4 106.2 578.4
(1) #6 AWG350 kcmil
(1) #4 AWG300 kcmil
64.3 355.4 64.3 355.4 64.3 355.4 53.1 290 53.1 290 53.1 290
(1) #24/0 AWG 42.5 254.6 42.5 254.6 42.5 254.6
JOHNSON CONTROLS
53
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SINGLE-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER
STD FIELD PROVIDED 120-1-60 POWER SUPPLY
(NOT REQUIRED IF OPTIONAL CONTROL TRANSFORMER FITTED)
FIELD PROVIDED UNIT POWER SUPPLY
LEGEND: Field Wiring Factory Wiring
21
Control Transformer*
Term Block or
NF Disc SW* or
Circuit Breaker*
Circuit #1
GRD
Circuit #2
Micropanel
Optional*
LD14536
Figure 16 - SINGLE POINT POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION STANDARD UNIT
It is possible that multiple sources of power can be supplying the unit power panel. To prevent serious injury or death, the technician should verify that NO LETHAL VOLTAGES are present inside the panel AFTER disconnecting power, PRIOR to working on equipment.
The unit evaporator heater uses 120 VAC. Disconnecting 120 VAC power from the unit, at or below freezing temperatures, can result in damage to the evaporator and unit as a result of the chilled liquid freezing.
54
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
DUAL-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER
STD FIELD PROVIDED 120-1-60 POWER SUPPLY
(NOT REQUIRED IF OPTIONAL CONTROL TRANSFORMER FITTED)
FIELD PROVIDED UNIT POWER SUPPLY
12
Control Transformer
Circuit Breaker
Circuit Breaker
5
Micropanel
Circuit #1
GRD
Circuit #2
Figure 17 - DUAL POINT POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION OPTIONAL
LD14535
It is possible that multiple sources of power can be supplying the unit power panel. To prevent serious injury or death, the technician should verify that NO LETHAL VOLTAGES are present inside the panel AFTER disconnecting power, PRIOR to working on equipment.
The unit evaporator heater uses 120 VAC. Disconnecting 120 VAC power from the unit, at or below freezing temperatures, can result in damage to the evaporator and unit as a result of the chilled liquid freezing.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
55
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
ELECTRICAL DATA
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Table 10 - MICRO PANEL POWER SUPPLY
UNIT VOLTAGE
MODELS w/o CONTROL TRANS
MODELS w/ CONTROL
TRANS
UNIT VOLTAGE
-17 -28 -40 -46 -50 -58
CONTROL POWER
115-1-60/50
200-1-60 230-1-60 380-1-60 460-1-60 380/415-1-60 575-1-60
MCA NOTE A
OVER CURRENT PROTECTION, SEE NOTE B
MIN
MAX
15 A
10 A
15 A
15 A 15 A 15 A 15 A 15 A 15 A
10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
15 A 15 A 15 A 15 A 15 A 15 A
A. Minimum #14 AWG, 75°C, Copper Recommended B. Minimum and Maximum Over Current Protection, Dual Element Fuse or Circuit Breaker
NF DISC SW
30 A / 240 V
30 A / 240 V 30 A / 240 V 30 A / 480 V 30 A / 480 V 30A / 415 V 30 A / 600 V
It is possible that multiple sources of power can be supplying the unit power panel. To prevent serious injury or death, the technician should verify that NO LETHAL VOLTAGES are present inside the panel AFTER disconnecting power, PRIOR to working on equipment.
The unit evaporator heater uses 120 VAC. Disconnecting 120 VAC power from the unit, at or below freezing temperatures, can result in damage to the evaporator and unit as a result of the chilled liquid freezing.
Table 11 - VOLTAGE RANGE (LIMITATIONS)
VOLTAGE CODE -17 -28 -40 -46 -50 -58
VOLTAGE RANGE UNIT POWER
200-3-60 230-3-60 380/415-3-60 460-3-60 380/415-3-50 575-3-60
MIN. 180 207 342 414 342 517
MAX. 220 253 440 506 440 633
56
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
ELECTRICAL NOTES
1. M inimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA) is based on 125% of the rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated load amps for all other loads included in the circuit, per NEC Article 43024. If the optional Factory Mounted Control Transformer is provided, add the following MCA values to the electrical tables for the system providing power to the transformer: 17, add 2.5 A; 28, add 2.3 A; 40, add 1.5 A, 46, add 1.3 A; 58, add 1 A.
2. The minimum recommended disconnect switch is based on 115% of the rated load amps for all loads included in the circuit, per NEC Article 440.
3. M inimum fuse size is based upon 150% of the rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated load amps for all other loads included in the circuit to avoid nuisance trips at startup due to lock rotor amps. It is not recommended in applications where brown outs, frequent starting and stopping of the unit, and/or operation at ambient temperatures in excess of 95ºF (35ºC) is anticipated.
4. M aximum fuse size is based upon 225% of the rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated load amps for all other loads included in the circuit, per NEC Article 440-22.
5. C ircuit breakers must be UL listed and CSA certified and maximum size is based on 225% of the rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated load amps for all other loads included in the circuit. Otherwise, an HACR type circuit breakers must be used. Maximum HACR circuit breaker rating is based on 225% of the rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated load amps for all other loads included in the circuit.
6. The "INCOMING WIRE RANGE" is the minimum and maximum wire size that can be accommodated by the unit wiring lugs. The (2) preceding the wire range indicates the number of termination points available per phase of the wire range specified. Actual wire size and number of wires per phase must be determined based on the National Electrical Code, using copper connectors only. Field wiring must also comply with local codes.
7. An equipment ground lug(s) is provided for the incoming power. Ground line sizing must be in accordance with the current NEC Table 250122.
8. F ield Wiring by others which complies to the National Electrical Code and Local Codes. 9. V oltage Utilization Range
RATED VOLTAGE 200/60/3
UTILIZATION RANGE 180220
5
230/60/3
208254
380/60/3
342402
460/60/3
414508
575/60/3
520635
LEGEND
ACR C.B. D.E. DISC SW FACT MOUNT CB FLA HZ MAX MCA MIN MIN NF RLA S.P. WIRE UNIT MTD SERV SW LRA ECWT
ACROSS THE LINE START CIRCUIT BREAKER DUAL ELEMENT FUSE DISCONNECT SWITCH FACTORY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKER FULL LOAD AMPS HERTZ MAXIMUM MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY MINIMUM MINIMUM NON FUSED RATED LOAD AMPS SINGLE POINT WIRING UNIT MOUNTED SERVICE (NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH) LOCKED ROTOR AMPS ENTERING CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE
JOHNSON CONTROLS
57
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
Table 12 - GROUND LUG SIZING
RATING 60 A 70 A 80 A 90 A 100 A 125 A 125 A 150 A 175 A 200 A 225 A 250 A 400 A 400 A 600 A
CIRCUIT BREAKER OPTION INCOMING WIRE #141/0 AWG #141/0 AWG #141/0 AWG #141/0 AWG #141/0 AWG #141/0 AWG #24/0 AWG #24/0 AWG #4300 kcm #4300 kcm #4300 kcm #6350 kcm #250500 kcm (2) #3/0250 kcm (2) #250500 kcm
TERMINAL BLOCK OPTION
RATING
INCOMING WIRE
130 A
#121 AWG
165 A
#103/0 AWG
240 A
#10300 kcm
320 A
#4500 kcm
480 A
(2) #10300 kcm
Notes:
1. Start in correct power option table (breaker, terminal block)
2. Match engineering guide value for Amperage
3. Match engineering guide value for wire range
4. Note corresponding ground wire range
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
GROUND WIRE #146 AWG #146 AWG #146 AWG #146 AWG #82 AWG #82 AWG #82 AWG #82 AWG #61/0 AWG #61/0 AWG #61/0 AWG #43/0 AWG #24/0 AWG
(2) #61/0 AWG (2) #24/0 AWG
GROUND WIRE #82 AWG #61/0 AWG #43/0 AWG #24/0 AWG
(2) #43/0 AWG
58
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
JOHNSON CONTROLS
59
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
WIRING DIAGRAMS
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM YCRL0064, 0074, 0084, and 0118
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Figure 18 - STANDARD POWER, SINGLE POINT AND MULTIPLE POINT CONTROL PANEL WIRING, 4 COMPRESSOR UNIT
60
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
5
FIGURE 18 - STANDARD POWER, SINGLE POINT AND MULTIPLE POINT CONTROL PANEL WIRING, 4 COMPRESSOR UNIT (CONT'D)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
61
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM YCRL0096, 0126, 0156, 0177 and 0198
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Figure 19 - STANDARD POWER, SINGLE POINT AND MULTIPLE POINT CONTROL PANEL WIRING, 6 COMPRESSOR UNIT
62
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
5
FIGURE 19 - STANDARD POWER, SINGLE POINT AND MULTIPLE POINT CONTROL PANEL WIRING, 6 COMPRESSOR UNIT
JOHNSON CONTROLS
63
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM YCRL0064, 0074, 0084, and 0118
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
LD 12925
Figure 20 - STANDARD POWER AND SINGLE POINT POWER CIRCUIT, 4 COMPRESSOR UNIT
64
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM YCRL0064, 0074, 0084, and 0118
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
5
Figure 21 - MULTIPLE POINT POWER CIRCUIT, 4 COMPRESSOR UNIT
JOHNSON CONTROLS
LD 13998
65
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM YCRL0096, 0126, 0156, 0177 and 0198
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Figure 22 - STANDARD POWER AND SINGLE POINT POWER CIRCUIT, 6 COMPRESSOR UNIT
66
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM (CONT'D) YCRL0096, 0126, 0156, 0177 and 0198
5
Figure 23 - MULTIPLE POINT POWER CIRCUIT, 6 COMPRESSOR UNIT
JOHNSON CONTROLS
LD14000
67
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM YCRL0064, 0074, 0084, and 0118
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
LD12926
Figure 24 - STANDARD POWER AND SINGLE POINT CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, 4 COMPRESSOR UNIT
68
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
5
LD12927
FIGURE 24 - STANDARD POWER AND SINGLE POINT CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, 4 COMPRESSOR UNIT
JOHNSON CONTROLS
69
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM YCRL0064, 0074, 0084, and 0118
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Figure 25 - MULTIPLE POINT POWER CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, 4 COMPRESSOR UNIT
70
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
5
LD13999
FIGURE 25 - MULTIPLE POINT POWER CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, 4 COMPRESSOR UNIT (CONT'D)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
71
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM YCRL0096, 0126, 0156, 0177 and 0198
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Figure 26 - STANDARD POWER AND SINGLE POINT CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, 6 COMPRESSOR UNIT
72
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
5
FIGURE 26 - STANDARD POWER AND SINGLE POINT CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, 6 COMPRESSOR UNIT (CONT'D)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
73
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM YCRL0096, 0126, 0156, 0177 and 0198
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Figure 27 - MULTIPLE POINT CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, 6 COMPRESSOR UNIT
74
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
5
LD14001
FIGURE 27 - MULTIPLE POINT CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, 6 COMPRESSOR UNIT (CONT'D)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
75
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM DETAILS YCRL0064, 0074, 0084, and 0118
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
035-21481-103 REV -
LD12928
Notes: I. F ield wiring to be in accordance with the current edition of the National Electrical Code as well as all other applicable codes and specifications. 2. Contacts must be suitable for switching 24 VDC (gold contacts recommended). Wiring must not be run in the same conduit with any line
voltage (class 1) wiring. 3. To cycle unit ON and OFF automatically with contact shown, install a cycling device in series with the flow switch. See Note 2 for contact
rating and wiring specifications. 4. To stop unit (emergency stop) with contacts other than those shown, install the stop contact between terminals 5 and 1. If a stop device is
not installed, a jumper must be connected between terminals 5 and 1. Device must have a minimum contact rating of 6 A at 115 VAC. 5. Contacts are rated at 115 V, 100 VA, resistive load only, and must be suppressed at load by user. 6. S ee Installation Operation and Maintenance manual when optional equipment is used. 7. Optional current readout, 5 V = 200 A. 8. 1MP thru 3MP are contained in their respective compressor junction boxes.
LEGEND TS Transient Voltage Suppression.
Terminal Block for customer low voltage (class 2) connections. See Note 2.
Terminal block for YORK and customer connections.
Wiring and components by YORK.
Optional equipment.
Wiring and/or components by others.
Figure 28 - STANDARD POWER, SINGLE POINT AND MULTIPLE POINT ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM DETAILS, 4 COMPRESSOR
76
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM DETAILS (CONT'D)
5
LD12929
FIGURE 28 - STANDARD POWER, SINGLE POINT AND MULTIPLE POINT ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM DETAILS, 4 COMPRESSOR (CONT'D)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
77
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM DETAILS YCRL0096, 0126, 0156, 0177 and 0198
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
035-21499-103 REV B
Notes:
I. F ield wiring to be in accordance with the current edition of the National Electrical Code as well as all other applicable codes and specifications.
2. Contacts must be suitable for switching 24 VDC (gold contacts recommended). Wiring must not be run in the same conduit with any line
voltage (class 1) wiring.
3. To cycle unit ON and OFF automatically with contact shown, install a cycling device in series with the flow switch. See Note 2 for contact
rating and wiring specifications.
4. To stop unit (emergency stop) with contacts other than those shown, install the stop contact between terminals 5 and 1. If a stop device is
not installed, a jumper must be connected between terminals 5 and 1. Device must have a minimum contact rating of 6 A at 115 VAC.
5. Contacts are rated at 115 V, 100 VA, resistive load only, and must be suppressed at load by user.
6. See Installation Operation and Maintenance manual when optional equipment is used.
7. Optional current readout, 5 V = 200 A. 8. 1MP thru 3MP are contained in their respective compressor junction boxes.
LEGEND TS Transient Voltage Suppression.
Terminal Block for customer low voltage (class 2) connections. See Note 2.
Terminal block for YORK and customer connections.
Wiring and components by YORK.
Optional equipment.
Wiring and/or components by others.
LD12935
Figure 29 - STANDARD POWER, SINGLE POINT AND MULTIPLE POINT ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM DETAILS, 6 COMPRESSOR
78
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM DETAILS (CONT'D)
5
FIGURE 29 - STANDARD POWER, SINGLE POINT AND MULTIPLE POINT ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM DETAILS, 6 COMPRESSOR (CONT'D)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
79
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM DETAILS (CONT'D)
Figure 30 - EEV CONTROLLER WIRING 80
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
UNIT DIMENSIONS - ENGLISH - FOUR COMPRESSOR
RELIEF VALVE
INLET
OUTLET
5
Notes: 1. Recommended service clearances:
Rear to wall - 20 in. (508 mm) Front to wall - 36 in. (915 mm) Top - 43 in. (1092 mm) Tube cleaning and removal - 132 in. (3353 mm) either end 2. Relief valve connection sizes. Low side (suction line) - 1/2 in. flare
YCRL (4 Comp)
0064HE 0074HE 0084HE 0118HE
W
32.5
33.7
33.7
33.7
H
56.6
63.6
63.6
63.3
L
121.5
120.5
123.2
120.5
A
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
B
27.5
27.5
27.5
27.5
D
11.8
16
16
16
E
8.6
8.6
8.6
8.6
F
24.5
29
29
29
G
29
29
29
29
J
17.7
17.7
17.7
17.7
K
12.3
12.8
12.8
12.8
M
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
N
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
R
85
83
83
83
H* - for 200/230 volt units, which require a larger electrical enclosure
JOHNSON CONTROLS
YCRL (4 Comp)
S T U X AA BB CC DD EE FF GG-1 GG-2 HH
0064HE 0074HE 0084HE 0118HE
3.5 116.7 24.7
21 21 50 13.5 30.7 81.1 37.3 39.5 39.5 18.3
4.5 115.7 23.7 22.2
21 50 13.5 33 82.1 34.9 39.5 39.5 14.7
4.5 118.3 26.3 22.3
21 50 13.5 33 78.7 34.4 39.5 39.5 14.7
4.5 115.7 22.1 22.2
21 50 14 33 79.1 34.8 41 41 14.9
81
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
UNIT DIMENSIONS - ENGLISH - SIX COMPRESSOR
INLET
RELIEF VALVE
OUTLET
Notes: 1. Recommended service clearances:
Rear to wall - 20 in. (508 mm) Front to wall - 36 in. (915 mm) Top - 43 in. (1092 mm) Tube cleaning and removal - 132 in. (3353 mm) either end 2. Relief valve connection sizes. Low side (suction line) - 1/2 in. flare
YCRL (6 Comp)
W H L A B D E F G J K M N R
0096HE
38 59.1 140.6 13.8 27.5 16 8.6 28 29 17.7 17.8 12.3 12.3 102
0126HE
38 64.6 142.6 13.8 27.5 16 8.6 28 29 17.7 17.8 12.3 12.3 102
0156HE
38 64.5 140.8 13.8 27.5 16 8.6 28 29 17.7 15.3 12.3 12.3 102
0177SE
38.0 64.5 140.8 13.8 27.5 16.0 8.6 28.0 29.0 17.7 15.3 12.3 12.3 102.0
0198SE
38.0 64.5 140.8 13.8 27.5 16.0 8.6 28.0 29.0 17.7 15.3 12.3 12.3 102.0
H* - for 200/230 volt units, which require a larger electrical enclosure
EE
YCRL (6 Comp)
S T U X AA BB CC DD EE FF GG-1 GG-2 HH
0096HE
7 135.8 19.8 23.3 32.8
50 15 33.3 94.2 32 57.9 57.9 14.7
0126HE
7 137.6 21.6 23.3 32.8
50 15.3 33.8 95.4 33.2 57.7 57.7 14.9
0156HE
7 135.8 19.8 23.2 32.8
50 17.8 33.8 95.4 33.2 53.7 53.7 14.9
0177SE
7.0 135.8 19.8 23.2 32.8 50.0 17.8 33.8 95.4 33.2 53.7 53.7 14.9
0198SE
7.0 135.8 19.8 23.2 32.8 50.0 17.8 33.8 95.4 33.2 53.7 53.7 14.9
82
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
A
ISOLATOR SELECTION DATA
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
B
C
CONTROL PANEL
D
MODEL YCRL
UNIT
SHIPPING WEIGHT
TOTAL
OPERATING WEIGHT
WEIGHT ON EACH FRONT
ISOLATOR
WEIGHT ON EACH BACK ISOLATOR
STANDARD ISOLATOR SELECTION
NEOPRENE ISOLATOR
SEISMIC
ISOLATOR SLRS-2-C2-
0064HE
2883
2973
699
0074HE
3261
3531
797
766
CP-1D-1200 GRAY
RD-3 CHARCOAL
RED/BLACK
5
913
CP-1D-1200 GRAY
RD-4 BRICK RED
RED/BLACK
0084HE
3439
3709
821
977
CP-1D-1200 GRAY
RD-4 BRICK RED
RED/BLACK
0096HE
3753
4043
896
1112
CP-1D-1360 RD-4 BRICK
WHITE
RED
PINK
0118HE
3705
3975
866
1092
CP-1D-1360 RD-4 BRICK
WHITE
RED
PINK
0126HE
4587
5037
1008
1386
CP-1D-1785N RD-4 BRICK
GRAY/RED
RED
PINK/GRAY
0156HE
4989
5439
1084
1609
C2P-1D-2400 GRAY
RD-4 BRICK RED
PINK/GRAY
0177SE
4418
4773
1380
1054
CP-1D-1785N RD-4 BRICK
GRAY/RED
RED
PINK
0198SE
4868
5223
1522
1089
C2P-1D-1800 DK. GREEN
RD-4 BRICK RED
PINK/GRAY
JOHNSON CONTROLS
83
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
ISOLATOR INFORMATION ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATORS CROSS-REFERENCE
5/8"
Ø1/2" H"
MOUNT
TYPE
W
CP1
3
CP2
3
MODEL NUMBER
CP1-1D-85 CP1-1D-120 CP1-1D-175 CP1-1D-250 CP1-1D-340 CP1-1D-510 CP1-1D-675 CP1-1D-900 CP1-1D-1200 CP1-1D-1360 CP1-1D-1785N
MODEL NUMBER
CP2-1D-1020 CP2-1D-1350 CP2-1D-1800 CP2-1D-2400 CP2-1D-2720 CP2-1D-3570N
84
T"
D" W"
C" B" L"
LD13759A
DIMENSION DATA (INCHES)
D
L
B
C
5/8
7 3/4
6 1/2
4 3/4
5/8
10 1/2
9 1/4
7 3/4
RATED CAPACITY
(LB)
85 120 175 250 340 510 675 900 1200 1360 1785
RATED CAPACITY
(LB) 1020 1350 1800 2400 2720 3570
RATED DEFLECTION
(IN)
1.36 1.2 1.17 1.4 1.13 1.02 1.32 1.02 0.9 0.77 0.88
RATED DEFLECTION
(IN) 1.02 1.32 1.02 0.9 0.77 0.88
T
H
1/2
5 5/8
9/16
6
COLOR CODE
LT. PURPLE DK. YELLOW
DK. BLUE YELLOW
RED BLACK DK. PURPLE DK. GREEN GRAY WHITE GRAY/RED
COLOR CODE
BLACK DK. PURPLE DK. GREEN
GRAY WHITE GRAY / RED
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATORS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1. Read instructions in their entirety before beginning installation.
2. Isolators are shipped fully assembled and are to be positioned in accordance with the submittal drawings or as otherwise recommended.
3. Set isolators on floor, housekeeping pad or subbase, ensuring that all isolator centerlines match the equipment mounting holes. The VMC group recommends that the isolator base ("B") be installed on a level surface. Shim or grout as required, leveling all isolator bases to the same elevation (1/4-inch maximum difference can be tolerated).
4. Bolt or anchor all isolators to supporting structure utilizing base slotted holes ("C").
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
5. Place equipment on top of isolators making sure that mounting holes of the equipment line up with isolator positioning pin ("H").
6. The adjustment process can only begin after the equipment or machine is at its full operating weight.
7. Adjust each isolator in sequence by turning spring adjusting bolt ("D") one full counterclockwise turn at a time. Repeat this procedure on all isolators, one at a time.
8. Continue adjusting each isolator until a minimum of 1/4 in. clearance is achieved between the lower housing and upper housing. (See drawing below).
9. Fine adjust isolators to level equipment. 10. Installation is complete.
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
LD13790
85
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
ISOLATOR INFORMATION (CONT'D) DURALENE ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE
RD-Style Isolators
DW
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
CD HF
MOLDED DURULENE
ø AD THRU
TYP 2 PLACES
AL L
BT W
LD13760A
Notes:
1. All dimensions are inches, interpreted per ANSI Y14. 2. See next page for installation instruN1.octAteilslo:dnimse.nsions are inches, interpreted per ANSI Y14. 3. Mount molded in weather resistant23..dRMueorfuaenrltetomnPoeladgecedo9in8mwfoperaoitnhusetnar lrdleastiaiosnstainnststdtrauurcnatidloennaser.dco.mApolsunod aasvsatailnadbarlde. Ainlsooatvhaeilarblme ian toethreiramlsatesruialcsh as natural rubber, extreme high
temperature silicone, high-dampedsuschiliacsonnateur,alnruitbrbileer, eaxntredmEe hDigPh Mtem.perature silicone, high-damped silicone, nitrile and EDPM.
4. AL = Mounting hole center to center spacing.
4. AL = Mounting hole center to cente5.r HsFp=aFcrienegh.eight of mount, prior to loading. Operating height calculated by the free height less the 5. HF = Free height of mount, prior tos6t.alotHicaadrddewifnleagcreti.oznOinucpn-edeleerrcatlrotoaipndla.gtAedhll.deimigehnstiocnas lfcorurelafetreendceboynlyt.he free height less the static deflection under load. All
dimensions for reference only.
6. Hardware zinc-electroplated.
Mount
Dimension Data (inches)
Type
L
W
HF
AL
AD
BT
CD
DW
RD1-WR
3.13
1.75
1.25
2.38
0.34
0.19
5/16-18 UNC X 3/4
1.25
RD2-WR
3.88
2.38
1.75
3.00
0.34
0.22
3/8-16 UNC X 1
1.75
RD3-WR
5.50
3.38
2.88
4.13
0.56
0.25
1/2-13 UNC X 1
2.50
RD4-WR
6.25
4.63
2.75
5.00
0.56
0.38
1/2-13 UNC X 1
3.00
MODEL NUMBER
RD2-Light Blue-WR RD2-Brown-WR
RD2-Brick Red-WR RD 2-Lime-WR
RATED CAPACITY
[LB]
RATED DEFLECTION
[IN]
DURO (± 5)
35
0.4
30
45
0.4
40
70
0.4
50
120
0.4
60
MODEL NUMBER
RD3-Brown-WR RD3-Brick Red-WR
RD3-Lime-WR RD3-Charcoal-WR
RATED
RATED
CAPACITY DEFLECTION
[LB]
[IN]
250
0.5
525
0.5
750
0.5
1100
0.5
DURO (± 5)
40 50 60 70
MODEL NUMBER
RD2-Light Blue-WR RD2-Brown-WR
RD2-Brick Red-WR RD 2-Lime-WR
RD2 Charcoal-WR
RATED CAPACITY
[LB]
RATED DEFLECTION
[IN]
DURO (± 5)
135
0.5
30
170
0.5
40
240
0.5
50
380
0.5
60
550
0.5
70
MODEL NUMBER
RD4-Brown-WR RD4-Brick Red-WR
RD4-Lime-WR RD4-Charcoal-WR
RATED CAPACITY
[LB] 1500 2250 3000
RATED DEFLECTION
[IN] 0.5 0.5 0.5
DURO (± 5)
40 50 60
4000
0.5
70
86
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
INSTALLATION OF DURALENE VIBRATION ISOLATORS
1. Read instructions in their entirety before beginning installation.
4. Bolt or anchor all isolators to supporting structure utilizing base thru holes ("B").
2. 1I.soRlEaAtDorINsSaTrReUsChTiIOpNpSedINfTuHlElyIRaEsNsTeImREbTlYeBdEaFnOdREaBreEGtoINbNeING INSTAL5L.ATRIOeNm. ove top bolt and top washer. Place equip2p.oISsiOtLioATnOeRdSinARaEcScHoIrPdPaEnDcFeULwLYithAStShEeMsBuLbEDmAitNiDalAdREraTwO-BE POSITIONEDmINent on top of isolators so that mounting holes inAgCsCoOrRaDsANoCthEeWrwITHisTeHrEeScUoBmMmITTeAnLdDeRdA.WINGS OR AS OTHERWISE RECOiMnMeEqNuDiEpDm. ent or base line up with threaded hole 3. SET ISOLATORS ON FLOOR, HOUSEKEEPING PAD, OR SUB-BASE, ENSURIN("GCT"H)A.T ALL
3. SeIStOiLsAoTlOatRoCrsENoTnERfLloINoErS, MhAoTuCsHekTHeEepEiQnUgIPpMaEdNT, MoOr UsNuTbIN-G HOLES. THE VMC GROUP baSRsHEeIC,MOeOMnRMsGEuNRriDOnSUgTTHtAhASaTRtTEHaQElUlIISRisOEoLDAl,aTLtOEoVRrEBLcAIeNSnGEteA("rLAlL"i)nISBeOEsLINAmSTOTaARtLcBLhEADSEOSNTAOLTEH6VE.ESLRASMeUiERnFsAtCaEll. top bolt and washer and tighten down. thEeLEeVqAuTiIpOmN (e1n/3t2-mINoCHunMtAinXIgMUhMolDeIFsF. ETRhENeCVE CMANCBgErToOuLpERATED). 7. Installation is complete. r4e. BcOoLmTmORenAdNCsHtOhRatALtLhIeSOiLsAoTlOaRtoSrTObaSsUePP(O"RAT"IN)GbSeTRiUnC-TURE UTILIZING BASE staTlHlReUd HoOnLEaS ("lBe"v).el surface. Shim or grout as re-
5q.uRiEreMdO,VEleTvOePliBnOgLT aAlNlDiTsOoPlaWtoArSHbEaRs. ePsLACtoE EtQhUeIPMsaEmNTeON TOP OF ISOLATORS SO eleTHvAaTtiMoOnU(N1T/I3N2G-HinOcLhESmINaExQimUIPuMmENdTiOffRerBeAnScEeLINcEanUPbWeITH THREADED HOLE ("C").
6to. RleErIaNtSeTdA)L.L TOP BOLT AND WASHER AND TIGHTEN DOWN.
7. INSTALLATION IS COMPLETE.
("B")
TOP BOLT
TOP WASHER
5
D
D
("C")
("B")
CL
CL
("A")
SECTION D-D
LD13762
JOHNSON CONTROLS
87
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
TWO INCH DEFLECTION, SEISMIC SPRING ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE
Y2RS
5"
1-1/8"
5/8" 2-3/4"
2-3/4" 12"
3/8" GAP
Ø3/4" TYP.(4)
5/8-11UNC TYP. (4)
3/4" 7/8"
12-1/4" 14"
1/2" LIMIT
STOP AND
NUT
8-3/8"
OPER.
HEIGHT
3-1/2"
3/8"
5" LD13761A
Notes:
NOTES:
1. All dimensions are in inch12..esSA,TLiLAnNDteDIMrApERrNDeStFIOIpNNeISSrHAA:RNHEOSIUNISYIINN1CG4H-.PEOSW, INDTEERRCPOREATTEPDER(CAONLSOIRY:1B4L.ACK), SPRING-POWDER COATED (COLOR: SEE T 2. Standard finish: housing-powHdAReDr WcoAaRtEeZdIN(Cc-oElLoErC, TbRlaOcPkLA),TsE.pring-powder coated (color, see table below) hardware - zinc-electroplate. 3. Equipment must be bolte34d.. oAErLQLwUSIePPlMdREeINNdGTStMoAUtRhSETeDBtEEoSpBIGOpNLlaTEEDteDFtOOoRRmW50eE%eLDtOEaVDElloRTwLOOaTAHbDEleCTAsOPePAisPCmLITAYiTcEWrTaITOtHinMEgEXsECT.EAPLTLIOONWAOBFLTEHSEE2ISDM-3I2C8R0NAT&IN2GD-S2.870
4. All springs are designed 65fo.. rCR5OE0FN%ESRUoLTTvOeFPrAAlCoGTaEOdRcYaFFpOOaRRcCIiNtOySNTwCAiLRthLEATeTEIxOIcNNeSIpTNAtSiLToLRnAUToCIOfTNItOh. NeS2. D-3280N and 2D-2870. 5. See next page for installation instructions.
6. Consult factory for concrete installation.
MODEL Y2RSI-2D SEISMICALLY RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATOR FOR 2" DEFLECTION
SEISMIC MOUNT SIZE
RATED LOAD (LB)
RATED DEFLECTION
(IN.)
SPRING RATE (LB/IN.)
SOLID LOAD (LB)
COLOR CODE
ALLOWABLE G RATING
HORIZONTAL
Y2RSI-2D-150
150
2.42
62
234
WHITE
34.7
Y2RSI-2D-320
320
2.29
140
490
YELLOW
16.3
Y2RSI-2D-460
460
2.30
200
688
GREEN
11.3
Y2RSI-2D-710
710
2.15
330
1072
DK BROWN
7.3
Y2RSI-2D-870
870
1.89
460
1312
RED
6.0
Y2RSI-2D-1200N
1200
1.88
638
1818
RED/ BLACK
4.3
Y2RSI-2D-1450
1450
1.81
900
2450
TAN
3.6
Y2RSI-2D-1690
1690
1.69
1140
2892
PINK
3.1
Y2RSI-2D-2000N
2000
1.69
1318
3342
PINK/ BLACK
2.6
Y2RSI-2D-2640N
2640
1.54
1854
4283
PINK/ GRAY
2.0
Y2RSI-2D-2870N
3080
1.54
2004
4629
PINK/GRAY/ ORANGE
1.7
Y2RSI-2D-3280N
3740
1.75
2134
4930
PINK/GRAY/ DK BROWN
1.4
88
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA
SEISMIC ISOLATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT
1. Read instructions in their entirety before begin-
of (2) 5/8 UNC A325 grade 5 SAE bolts or weld
ning installation.
equipment or bracket to the top plate ("A") of iso-
lator with a minimum of 3/8 fillet welds 2 in. long
2. Isolators are shipped fully assembled and are to be
@ 3 in. on center for a minimum total weld of 10
po1s.iRtiEoAnDeINdSiTnRUaCcTcIoOrNdSaINncTHeEwIRiEthNTtIhReETsYuBbEmFOiRttEalBEdGraINwNI-NG INSTALLATiInO.N.(All sides of equipment or bracket resting on
ings or as otherwise recommended. 2.ISOLATORS ARE SHIPPED FULLY ASSEMBLED
AND
ARE
TO
BE
POSITIONEDtoINp
plate
("A")
must
be
welded).
3.
Set
AiCsCoOlaRtDoArNsCoE nWITflHoToHrE,
ShUoBuMsIeTTkAeLeDpRiAnWgINpGaSdO, RoArSsOuTbH-ERWISE
RECOMMENDED.
7. The adjustment
process
can
only
begin
after
the
ba3s.AeSL,ELTeInISSsOOuLLArAiTTnOOgRRSCthEOaNNtTFEaLRlOLlOINiRsE,oSHlMOaAUtoTSCrEHKcETeEHnPEtINeEGrQlUPinAIPeDMs,EONmRTSaMUtOcBUh-BNATSINEG, EHNOSLUERSIN.eTGqHTuEHiVpAMTmCent or machine is at its full operating the GeRqOuUiPpRmEeCnOtMMmEoNuDnStTiHnAgT hTHoEleISsO. LTAThOeRVBAMSECPLgArToEuSp("B") BE INSTALLwEDeiOgNhAt. rinecstoLPTaELOmlVAlLeETmEELdRSeASonTUTEndORDFsTa)A.HtChElEeaS.vtASetMHhlEIeMsEuiOLsrERofValGAacRTteIOoO.UrNSTb(h1Aa/iS4sm-eRINECpoQHlrUaMItgReAErsXoDIM(u, "LUtEBMaV"EDs)LIFIrNbFeGEe-RAELNLCISEOCLAA8NT.OBREBBaAcSkE off each of the (4) limit stop lock nuts ("F")
qu4ir.BeOdL,TleOvReAlNinCgHOaRllAiLsLoISlaOtLoArTObRaSseTOplSaUtPePsOtRoTtINhGeSsTaRmUCeTURE UTILIZINoGnBAiSsEolators 1/2 in.
elevP3/aL8AtFiToIELnLTEHT(R1WU/E4HL-ODiLn2Ec"ShLO("CNm"G)aO@xRi4mW" OEuNLmDCBEdANSiTfEEfRPeLrAAeRTnOEcUTeNODcSEaUNnPTPIORbREeTBIANSGESPTLRAUT9CE.TOUARRdEAjSWuIsTtHeach isolator in sequence by turning spring
toleErNaGteINdE)E.RED FOR SPECIFIC LOAD AND OR FIELD CONDITIONS.
adjusting nuts ("G") one full clockwise turn at a
4. Bo5l.(tI"SEoO")rLBAaETnTOcWRhESoEANrRaTEHllSEHiTsIPOoPPlEaPDtLoTArOTsETtAHoNEsDJuOTpBHpESoIHTrOEtiUWnSgIITNHGst.(2rT)uHRcEEtSMuEOrSeVHAIMBLSEMSUPSATCEBREtiSINmHPIeML.SACREepeat this procedure on all isolators, one
utilWizHinENg TbHaEsEeQpUlIPaMteENtThrISuPhOoSIlTeIOs N(E"DCO"V)EoRrTHwEeISldOLbATaOsReS.
at a time. Check the limit stop lock nuts ("F")
pla6t.eWITtoH AsLuLpSpHoIMrSti(n"Eg") sINtrPuLcAtCuEr,ePOwSiITthION3E/8QUfIiPlMleEtNTwOeNldTOP OF PLATE (p"Ae"r)iOoFdically to ensure that clearance between the
2atis"onelIMB@ToSnsROIOn.Ng3ALTgI"iCMAHnOKTU@Ee.EOCMeTT.ROrO4FR.ePOFB"EdROPS(o2LLTfA)nAToI5NMTrE/cG8EIQNesUO(UInp"MNANItePCU"e)TcMMrAOOiEf3aFPTNi2OrcIT5PSoTLGSlOuAAoERLLnTaCAAEWddTUD(OERE"eaALREn5Dn"L)WtSdYMOiAIrTUTFoeEHOS1rBbT0ATOf"aBO.iMLsEe(PTAIelNWLPdOILpLMERAScLlUaTWDIoDMEtEnEEeD3OLSd/)Do8F.iOr-FEIFSIQLOELULQEIAPTUTMIWOPEMRENLEUTDNSOSTINRwa(2OG""dBRaLARjAOsuA"NhsC)GetKmrhETaeasnnrtdisoreufnbijbsuoesrltagatobroromvoemnlteyhtewisshhmiemnai(nt"htEaei"n)to.edp.
Stop plate
5
5. Iso7l.aTtHoErsADaJrUeSTsMhEipNpTePdROtCoESthSeCAjNobONsLiYteBEwGIiNthAF(T2E)R rTeH-E EQUIPM1E0N.T ORReMmAoCvHeINEalISl sApTaITcSer shims ("E").
FULL OPERATING WEIGHT.
movable spacer shims ("E") between the top plate
11. Fine adjust isolators to level equipment.
an8d. tBhAeCKhOoFuFsEinACgH. OTFhTeHsEe(4s)hLIiMmITsSTmOuPsLtOCbKeNiUnTSp("lFa"c) OeN ISOLATORS 1/2".
wh9e. nADtJhUeSTeEqAuCiHpmISOeLnAtTiOsRpINoSsEitQioUnENeCdEoBvYeTrURthNeINGisSoPlRaI-NG ADJUS1T2IN. GANdUjTuSs(t"Ga")llONliEmFUitLLstop lock nuts ("F") per isolator,
tors. CCLHOECCKKWTIHSEE LTIUMRITNSATTOAP
TIME. REPEAT THIS PROCEDURE ON ALL ISOLATmORaSi,nOtNaiEnAiTnAgTaIM1E/. 4
LOCK NUTS ("F") PERIODICALLY TO ENSURE THAT CLEARANCE
in.
to
3/8
in.
gap.
The
limit
stop
BETWEEN THE WASHER AND RUBBER GROMMET IS MAINTAINED. STOP AnDuJtUsSTmMEuNsTt ObFe kept at this gap to ensure uniform
6. WithISaOlLlAsThOiRmOsNL("YEW"H)ENinTHpElaTcOeP,PpLoATsEiti("oAn") HeAqSuRipISmENenJUtST ABOVE THEbSoHlItMlo("Ea"d).ing during uplift (as the case when equip-
on10t.oRpEMoOfVpElAaLtLeS(P"AACE"R) SoHfIMiSso("lEa")t.or. Bolt equipment
ment is drained).
sec11u.rFeINlyE AtDoJUtoSpT IpSOlaLtAeTOoRfSiTsOolLaEtVoErLuEQsiUnIPgMaENmT.inimum
13. Installation is complete.
12. ADJUST ALL LIMIT STOP LOCK NUTS ("F") PER ISOLATOR, MAINTAINING 1/4-TO 3/8-INCH GAP. THE LIMIT STOP NUTS MUST BE KEPT AT THIS GAP TO ENSURE UNIFORM BOLT LOADING DURING UPLIFT (AS THE CASE WHEN EQUIPMENT IS DRAINED).
13. INSTALLATION IS COMPLETE.
("A")
("E") CL
("G")
("E")
GROMMET
("A")
CL
1/4 - 3/8 GAP
("F") WASHER
("F")
EQUIPMENT ("E")
("C") ("B")
("C")
LD13763A
JOHNSON CONTROLS
89
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
90
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 6 COMMISSIONING
GENERAL Commissioning of this unit should only be carried out by Johnson Controls Authorized personnel.
Commissioning personnel should be thoroughly familiar with the information contained in this literature, in addition to this section.
Perform the commissioning using the detailed checks outlined in the Equipment Pre Start-Up And Start-Up Checklist on Page 93 as the commissioning procedure is carried out.
PREPARATION POWER OFF
The following basic checks should be made with the customer power to the Unit switched OFF.
Inspection Inspect unit for installation damage. If found, take action and/or repair as appropriate.
Refrigerant Charge Units are normally shipped with a nitrogen holding charge. Check that refrigerant pressure is present in both systems and that no leaks are apparent. If no pressure is present, a leak test must be undertaken, the leak(s) located and repaired. Remote systems and units are supplied with a nitrogen holding charge. These systems must be evacuated with a suitable vacuum pump/ recovery unit as appropriate to below 500 microns.
Do not liquid charge with static water in the cooler. Care must also be taken to liquid charge slowly to avoid excessive thermal stress at the charging point. Once the vacuum is broken, charge into the condenser coils with the full operating charge as given in SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA.
Service and Oil Line Valves Open each compressor suction, economizer, and discharge service valve. If valves are of the back-seat type, open them fully (counterclockwise) then close one turn of the stem to ensure operating pressure is fed to pressure transducers. Open the liquid line service valve and oil return line ball valve fully in each system.
Compressor Oil
To add oil to a circuit connect a YORK hand oil pump (Part No. 470-10654-000) to the 1/4 in. oil charging connection on the compressors with a length of clean hose or copper line, but do not tighten the flare nut. Using clean oil of the correct type ("V" oil), pump oil until all air has been purged from the hose then tighten the nut. Stroke the oil pump to add oil to the oil system. Approximately 1.8 gallons to 2.3 gallons is present in the each refrigerant system.
Additional oil change may be required depending upon the length of piping.
Oil levels in the oil equalizing line sight glass should
be between the bottom and the middle of the sight glass
with the system off. High oil levels may cause exces-
sive oil carryover in the system. High oil concentration
in the system may cause nuisance trips resulting from incorrect readings on the level sensor and temperature
6
sensors. Temperature sensor errors may result in poor
liquid control and resultant liquid overfeed and sub-
sequent damage to the compressor. While running, a
visible sign of oil splashing in the sight glass is normal.
Isolation / Protection
Verify all sources of electrical supply to the unit are taken from a single point of isolation. Check that the maximum recommended fuse sizes given in SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA has not been exceeded.
Control Panel
Check the panel to see that it is free of foreign materials (wire, metal chips, etc.) and clean out if required.
Power Connections
Check that the customer power cables are connected correctly to the terminal blocks or optional circuit breaker. Ensure that connections of power cables within the panels to the circuit breaker or terminal blocks are tight.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
91
SECTION 6 COMMISSIONING
Grounding Verify that the unit's protective ground terminal(s) are properly connected to a suitable grounding point. Ensure that all unit internal ground connections are tight.
Supply Voltage Verify that the site voltage supply corresponds to the unit requirement and is within the limits given in SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA.
PREPARATION POWER ON Perform the commissioning using the detailed checks outlined in the Equipment Pre Start-up and Start-up Checklist as the commissioning procedure is carried out.
Apply power to the chiller. Turn ON the option panel circuit breaker if supplied.
The machine is now live!
Switch Settings Ensure that the chiller ON/OFF Unit Switch at the bottom of the keypad is OFF. Place the optional circuit breaker handle on the panel door to ON. The customer's disconnection devices can now be set to ON.
Verify the control panel display is illuminated. Ensure that the system switches under the SYSTEM SWITCHES key are in the OFF position.
Compressor Heaters Verify the compressor heaters are energized. If the ambient temperature is above 96°F (36°C) the compressor heaters must be ON for at least 8 hours before start-up to ensure all refrigerant liquid is driven out of the compressor and the oil. If the ambient temperature is below 86°F (30°C), allow 24 hours.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Water System
Verify the chilled liquid system has been installed correctly, and has been commissioned with the correct direction of water flow through the cooler. The inlet should be at the refrigerant piping connection end of the cooler. Purge air from the top of the cooler using the plugged air vent mounted on the top of the cooler body.
Flow rates and pressure drops must be within the limits given in SECTION 5 TECHNICAL DATA. Operation outside of these limits is undesirable and could cause damage.
If mains power must be switched OFF for extended maintenance or an extended shutdown period, the compressor suction, discharge and economizer service stop valves should be closed (clockwise). If there is a possibility of liquid freezing due to low ambient temperatures, the coolers should be drained or power should be applied to the chiller. This will allow the cooler heater to protect the cooler from freezing down to 20°F. Before placing the unit back in service, valves should be opened and power must be switched ON (if power is removed for more than 8 hours) for at least 8 hours (24 hours if ambient temperature is below 86°F [30°C]) before the unit is restarted.
Flow Switch
Verify a chilled water flow switch is correctly fitted in the customer's piping on the cooler outlet, and wired into the control panel correctly using shielded cable.
There should be a straight run of at least 5 pipe diameters on either side of the flow switch. The flow switch should be connected to terminals 13 and 14 of CTB1 in the panel.
Temperature Sensor(s)
Ensure the leaving liquid temperature sensor is coated with heat conductive compound (Part No. 013-00890000) and is inserted to the bottom of the water outlet sensor well in the cooler. This sensor also provides some freeze protection and must always be fully inserted in the water outlet sensor well.
92
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 6 COMMISSIONING
EQUIPMENT PRE START-UP AND START-UP CHECKLIST
JOB NAME: ______________________________ SALES ORDER #: _________________________ LOCATION: ______________________________ SOLD BY:________________________________ INSTALLING CONTRACTOR: ___________________________ STARTUP TECHNICIAN/ COMPANY: _______________________________
STARTUP DATE :_________________________
CHILLER MODEL #: _______________________ SERIAL #: ______________________________
Pre Start-up
Checking The System Prior To Initial Start (No Power)
Unit Checks
1. Inspect the unit for shipping or installation dam-
age.
2. Ensure that all piping has been completed. 3. Visually check for refrigerant piping leaks. 4. Open suction line ball valve, discharge line ball
valve, and liquid line valve for each system.
5. The compressor oil level should be maintained
so that an oil level is visible or splashing in the sight glass when fully loaded. At shutdown, the oil level should be between the bottom and middle of the oil sight glass.
6. Ensure water pumps are on. Check and adjust
water pump flow rate and pressure drop across the cooler (see Operational Limitations (English and SI) on Page 45). Verify flow switch operation.
Excessive flow may cause catastrophic damage to the heat exchanger (evaporator).
7. Check the control panel to ensure it is free of
foreign material (wires, metal chips, etc.).
8. Visually inspect wiring (power and control).
Wiring MUST meet NEC and local codes.
9. Check tightness of power wiring inside the
power panel on both sides of the motor contactors and overloads.
10. Check for proper size fuses in main and con-
trol circuits, and verify overload setting corresponds with RLA and FLA values in electrical tables.
11. Ensure 120 VAC Control Power to TB1 has 15
amp minimum capacity.
12. Be certain all water temp sensors are inserted
completely in their respective wells and are coated with heat conductive compound.
13. Ensure that evaporator TXV bulbs are strapped
onto the suction lines at 4 or 8 o'clock positions or suction temp. sensors if EEVs are installed.
Compressor Heaters (Power On 24 Hours Prior To Start)
6
1. Apply 120 VAC and verify its value between
terminals 5 and 2 of CTB2. The voltage should be 120 VAC plus or minus 10%.
Power must be applied 24 hours prior to start-up.
Each heater should draw approximately 0.5 A to 1 A.
Start-up
Panel Checks (Power On Unit switch Off)
1. Apply 3-phase power and verify its value. Volt-
age imbalance should be no more than 2% of the average voltage.
2. Apply 120 VAC and verify its value on the ter-
minal block in the power panel. Make the measurement between terminals 5 and L of CTB2. The voltage should be 120 VAC plus or minus 10%.
3. Program/verify the Cooling Setpoints, Program
Setpoints, and Unit Options. Record the values below in Table 13. (See Setpoints Keys on Page 114 and Unit Keys on Page 121 for programming instruction)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
93
SECTION 6 COMMISSIONING
Table 13 - SETPOINTS ENTRY LIST
OPTIONS
Display Language
Sys 1 Switch
Sys 2 Switch
Chilled Liquid
* Ambient Control
Local/Remote Mode
Control Mode
Display Units
* Lead/Lag Control
* Fan Control
N/A
Manual Override
Current Feedback
** Soft Start
** Unit Type
** Refrigerant Type
** Expansion Valve Type
COOLING SETPOINTS
Cooling Setpoint
Range
EMS-PWM Max. Setpoint
PROGRAM
Discharge Pressure Cutout
Suct. Pressure Cutout
Low Amb. Temp. Cutout
Leaving Liquid Temp. Cutout
Anti-Recycle Time
Fan Control On Pressure N/A
Fan Differential Off
N/A
Pressure
Total # of Compressors
* Number of Fans/System N/A
* Unit/Sys Voltage
Unit ID
* Not on All Models ** Viewable Only
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
4. Put the unit into Service Mode (as described
under the SECTION 9 SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING) and cycle each condenser fan to ensure proper rotation.
5. Prior to this step, turn system 2 OFF and system
1 ON (see Option 2 under Unit Keys on Page 121 for more information on system switches). Connect a manifold gauge to system 1 suction and discharge service valves.
Place the Unit Switch in the control panel to the ON position. As each compressor cycles ON, ensure that the discharge pressure rises and the suction pressure decreases. If this does not occur, the compressor being tested is operating in the reverse direction and must be corrected. After verifying proper compressor rotation, turn the Unit Switch to OFF.
The Chilled Liquid Setpoint may need to be temporarily lowered to ensure all compressors cycle ON.
This unit uses scroll compressors which can only operate in one direction. Failure to observe this will lead to compressor failure.
6. Turn system 1 OFF and system 2 ON (see Op-
tion 2 under Unit Keys on Page 121 for more information on system switches).
Place the Unit Switch in the control panel to the ON position. As each compressor cycles ON, ensure that the discharge pressure rises and the suction pressure decreases. If this does not occur, the compressor being tested is operating in the reverse direction and must be corrected. After verifying proper compressor rotation, turn the Unit Switch to OFF.
Excessive flow may cause catastrophic damage to the heat exchanger (evaporator).
94
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
CHECKING SUPERHEAT AND SUBCOOLING
The subcooling temperature of each system can be calculated by recording the temperature of the liquid line at the outlet of the condenser and subtracting it from the liquid line saturation temperature at the liquid stop valve (liquid line saturation temp. is converted from a temperature/pressure chart).
Example: Liquid line pressure =
325 psig converted to temp. 101°F minus liquid line temp. - 89°F Subcooling = 12°F
The subcooling should be adjusted to 12 °F at design conditions.
1. Record the liquid line pressure and its corre-
sponding temperature, liquid line temperature and subcooling below:
SYS 1 SYS 2 Liq Line Press = _______ _______ PSIG Saturated Temp = _______ _______ °F Liq Line Temp = _______ _______ °F
Subcooling = _______ _______ °F
After the subcooling is verified, the suction superheat should be checked. The superheat should be checked only after steady state operation of the chiller has been established, the leaving water temperature has been pulled down to the required leaving water temperature, and the unit is running in a fully loaded condition. Correct superheat setting for a system is 10°F to 15°F (5.56°C to 8.33°C) 18 in. (46 cm) from the heat exchanger.
Superheat should typically be set for no less than 10 °F with only a single compressor running on a circuit.
SECTION 6 COMMISSIONING
The superheat is calculated as the difference between the actual temperature of the returned refrigerant gas in the suction line entering the compressor and the temperature corresponding to the suction pressure as shown in a standard pressure/temperature chart.
Example: Suction Temp =
minus Suction Press 105 PSIG converted to Temp
Superheat =
46°F
- 34°F 12°F
When adjusting the expansion valve (TXV only), the adjusting screw should be turned not more than one turn at a time, allowing sufficient time (approximately 15 minutes) between adjustments for the system and the thermal expansion valve to respond and stabilize.
Ensure that superheat is set at a minimum of 10°F (5.56°C) with a single compressor running on each circuit.
2. Record the suction temperature, suction pres-
sure, suction saturation temperature, and super-
heat of each system below:
SYS 1 SYS 2
6
Suction Temp = _______ _______ °F
Suction Pressure = _______ _______ PSIG
Saturation Temp = _______ _______ °F
Superheat = _______ _______ °F
LEAK CHECKING
1. Leak check compressors, fittings, and piping to
ensure no leaks.
If the unit is functioning satisfactorily during the initial operating period, no safeties trip and the compressors cycle to control water temperature to setpoint, the chiller is ready to be placed into operation.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
95
SECTION 6 COMMISSIONING
UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE
The operating sequence described below relates to operation on a hot water start after power has been applied, such as start-up commissioning. When a compressor starts, internal timers limit the minimum time before another compressor can start to 1 minute.
1. For the chiller system to run, the Flow Switch must be closed, any remote cycling contacts must be closed, the Daily Schedule must not be scheduling the chiller off, and temperature demand must be present.
2. When power is applied to the system, the microprocessor will start a 2 minute timer. This is the same timer that prevents an instantaneous start after a power failure.
3. At the end of the 2 minute timer, the microprocessor will check for cooling demand. If all conditions allow for start, a compressor on the lead system will start and the liquid line solenoid will open. Coincident with the start, the anti-coincident timer will be set and begin counting downward from "60" seconds to "0" seconds.
If the unit is programmed for Auto Lead/Lag, the system with the shortest average run-time of the compressors will be assigned as the "lead" system. A new lead/lag assignment is made whenever all systems shut down.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
4. After 1 minute of compressor run time, the next compressor in sequence will start when a system has to load. Additional compressors will be started at 60 second intervals as needed to satisfy temperature setpoint.
5. If demand requires, the lag system will cycle ON with the same timing sequences as the lead system after the lead system has run for five minutes. See Capacity Control on Page 127 for a detailed explanation of system and compressor staging.
6. As the load decreases below setpoint, the compressors will be shut down in sequence. This will occur at intervals of either 60, 30, or 20 seconds based on water temperature as compared to setpoint, and control mode. See Capacity Control on Page 127 for a detailed explanation.
7. When the last compressor in a "system" (two or three compressors per system), is to be cycled off, the system will initiate a pump-down. Each "system" has a pump-down feature upon shut-off. On a non-Safety, non-Unit Switch shutdown, the LLSV will be turned off and the last compressor will be allowed to run until the suction pressure falls below the suction pressure cutout or for 180 seconds, whichever comes first.
96
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS YORK MILLENNIUM CONTROL CENTER
LD15596
INTRODUCTION
The YORK MicroComputer Control Center is a microprocessor based control system designed to provide the entire control for the liquid chiller. The control logic embedded in the microprocessor based control system will provide control for the chilled liquid temperatures, as well as sequencing, system safeties, displaying status, and daily schedules. The MicroComputer Control Center consists of four basic components:
1. IPU II and I/O Boards
2. Transformer
3. Display
4. Keypad
The keypad allows programming and accessing setpoints, pressures, temperatures, cutouts, daily schedule, options, and fault information.
Remote cycling, demand limiting and chilled liquid temperature reset can be accomplished by field supplied contacts.
Compressor starting/stopping and loading/unloading decisions are performed by the microprocessor to maintain leaving or return chilled liquid temperature. These decisions are a function of temperature deviation from setpoint.
A Master ON/OFF switch is available to activate ordeactivate the unit.
IPU II and I/O Boards
The IPU and I/O boards are assembled to function as
a single microprocessor controller requiring no addi-
tional hardware. The IPU II board contains a coldfire
microprocessor and is the controller and decision mak-
er in the control panel. The I/O board handles all the
chiller I/O (Inputs and Outputs). System inputs from
pressure transducers and temperature sensors are con-
nected to the I/O board. The I/O board contains a pro-
cessor capable of reading the inputs and controlling the outputs. It communicates through the transition header
7
with the IPU II microprocessor.
The I/O board circuitry multiplexes the analog inputs, digitizes them, and constantly scans them to keep watch on the chiller operating conditions. The input values are transmitted serially to the IPU II microprocessor board. From this information, the IPU II then issues commands to the I/O board relay outputs to control contactors, solenoids, etc. for Chilled Liquid Temperature Control and to react to safety conditions. The I/O board converts logic signals to operate relay outputs to 115 VAC levels used by motor contactors, fan contactors, solenoid valves, etc. to control system operation. The low voltage side of all relay coils on the I/O board are powered by +12 V.
Keypad commands are actuated upon by the microprocessor to change setpoints, cutouts, scheduling, operating requirements, and to provide displays. The keypad and display are connected to the I/O board.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
97
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
The on-board power supply converts 24 VAC from 75 VA, 120/24 VAC 50/60 Hz UL listed class 2 power transformer to +12 V, +5 V and +3.3 V using switching and linear voltage regulators located on the I/O and IPU II boards. These voltages are used to operate integrated circuitry on the board. The 40 Character Display and unit sensors (transducers and temp sensors) are supplied power for the microprocessor board +5 V supply. 24 VAC is rectified, but not regulated, to provide unregulated +30 VDC to supply all of the digital inputs.
The IPU II board contains one green "Power" LED to indicate that the board is powered up and one red "Status" LED to indicate by blinking that the processor is operating.
The I/O board contains one green "Power" LED to indicate that the board is powered up and one red "Status" LED to indicate by blinking that the processor is operating. The I/O board also contains two sets of Receiver/Transmit LED's, one for each available serial communication port. The receive LED's are green, and the Transmit LED's are red.
A jumper on the I/O board selects 4 mA to 20 mA or 0 VDC to 10 VDC as the input type on the remote temperature reset analog input.
Unit Switch
A unit ON/OFF switch is just underneath the keypad. This switch allows the operator to turn the entire unit OFF if desired. The switch must be placed in the ON position for the chiller to operate.
Display
The 40 Character Display (2 lines of 20 characters) is a liquid crystal display used for displaying system parameters and operator messages.
The display in conjunction with the keypad, allows the operator to display system operating parameters as well as access programmed information already in memory. The display has a lighted background for night viewing and for viewing in direct sunlight.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
When a key is pressed, such as the OPER DATA key, system parameters will be displayed and will remain on the display until another key is pressed. The system parameters can be scrolled with the use of the (UP) and (DOWN) arrow keys. The display will update all information at a rate of about 1 a second.
Display Messages may show characters indicating "greater than" (>) or "less than" (<). These characters indicate the actual values are greater than or less than the limit values which are being displayed.
Keypad
The 12 button non-tactile keypad allows the user to retrieve vitals system parameters such as system pressures, temperatures, compressor running times and starts, option information on the chiller, and system setpoints. This data is useful for monitoring chiller operation, diagnosing potential problems, troubleshooting, and commissioning the chiller.
It is essential the user become familiar with the use of the keypad and display. This will allow the user to make full use of the capabilities and diagnostic features available.
Battery Back-up
The IPU II contains a Real Time Clock integrated circuit chip with an internal battery backup. The purpose of this battery backup is to ensure that any programmed values (setpoints, clock, cutouts, etc.) are not lost during a power failure regardless of the time involved in a power cut or shutdown period.
Transformer
A 75 VA, 120/24 VAC 50/60 Hz transformer is provided to supply power to the microprocessor board, which in turn rectifies, filters, and regulates as necessary to supply power to the display, sensors, and transducers.
Programming # of Compressors
The total number of compressors is programmable under the PROGRAM key. Chillers can have 4 or 6 compressors.
98
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
STATUS KEY
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
00066VIP
Unit Status Pressing the STATUS key will enable the operator to determine current chiller operating status. The messages displayed will include running status, cooling demand, fault status, external cycling device status. The display will be a single message relating to the highest priority message as determined by the microprocessor. Status messages fall into the categories of General Status and Fault Status.
The following General, Safety, and Warning messages are displayed when the STATUS key is pressed. Following each displayed message is an explanation pertaining to that particular message.
General Status Messages In the case of messages which apply to individual systems, SYS 1 and SYS 2 messages will both be displayed and may be different. In the case of single system units, all SYS 2 messages will be blank.
UN I T SW I T CH O F F S H U T D OWN
This message informs the operator that the UNIT switch on the control panel is in the OFF position which will not allow the unit to run.
R EMO T E CON T RO L L E D S H U T D OWN
The REMOTE CONTROLLED SHUTDOWN message indicates that either an ISN system or RCC has turned the unit OFF, not allowing it to run.
`
DA I LY SCHEDULE
S H U T D OWN
The DAILY SCHEDULE SHUTDOWN message in-
dicates that the daily/holiday schedule programmed is
keeping the unit from running.
7
REMOTE STOP NO RUN PERM
REMOTE STOP NO RUN PERM shows that either the flow switch is open or a remote start/stop contact is open in series with the flow switch. These contacts are connected to J13-5. A 3-second delay is built into the software to prevent nuisance shutdowns due to erroneous signals on the run permissive input.
S Y S 1 S Y S SW I T CH O F F S Y S 2 S Y S SW I T CH O F F
SYS SWITCH OFF tells that the system switch under OPTIONS is turned OFF. The system will not be allowed to run until the switch is turned back on.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
99
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
S Y S 1 NO COOL LOAD S Y S 2 NO COOL LOAD
This message informs the operator that the chilled liquid temperature is below the point (determined by the setpoint and control range) that the microprocessor will bring on a system or that the microprocessor has not loaded the lead system far enough into the loading sequence to be ready to bring the lag system ON. The lag system will display this message until the loading sequence is ready for the lag system to start.
S Y S 1 COMP S RUN
X
S Y S 2 COMP S RUN
X
The COMPS RUNNING message indicates that the respective system is running due to demand. The "X" will be replaced with the number of compressors in that system that are running.
SYS 1 AR T I MER XX S SYS 2 AR T I MER XX S
The anti-recycle timer message shows the amount of time left on the respective systems anti-recycle timer. This message is displayed when the system is unable to start due the anti-recycle timer being active.
SYS 1 AC T I MER XX S SYS 2 AC T I MER XX S
The anti-coincidence timer is a software feature that guards against 2 systems starting simultaneously. This ensures instantaneous starting current does not become excessively high due to simultaneous starts. The microprocessor limits the time between compressor starts to 1 minute regardless of demand or the anti-recycle timer being timed out. The anti-coincidence timer is only present on two system units.
SYS 1 DSCH L I M I T I NG SYS 2 DSCH L I M I T I NG
When this message appears, Discharge Pressure Limiting is in effect. The Discharge Pressure Limiting feature is integral to the standard software control; however the discharge transducer is optional on some models. Therefore, it is important to keep in mind that this control will not function unless the discharge transducer is installed in the system.
100
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
The limiting pressure is a factory set limit to keep the system from faulting on the High Discharge Pressure Cutout due to high load or pull down conditions. When the unload point is reached, the microprocessor will automatically unload the affected system by de energizing one compressor. The discharge pressure unload will occur when the discharge pressure gets within 10 PSIG (0.69 barg) of the programmed discharge pressure cutout. This will only happen if the system is fully loaded and will shut only one compressor off. If the system is not fully loaded, discharge limiting will not go into effect. Reloading the affected system will occur when the discharge pressure drops to 85% of the unload pressure and 10 minutes have elapsed.
SYS 1 SUCT L I M I T I NG SYS 2 SUCT L I M I T I NG
When this message appears, suction pressure limiting is in effect. The suction pressure limit is a control point that limits the loading of a system when the suction pressure drops to within 15% above the suction pressure cutout. On a standard system programmed for 44 psig (3.0 bar) suction pressure cutout, the microprocessor would inhibit loading of the affected system with the suction pressure less than or equal to 1.15 x 44 psig (3.0 bar) equals 50 psig (3.5 bar). The system will be allowed to load after 60 seconds and after the suction pressure rises above the suction pressure load limit point.
S Y S 1 LOAD L I M I T X X% S Y S 2 LOAD L I M I T X X%
This message indicates that load limiting is in effect and the percentage of the limiting in effect. This limiting could be due to the load limit/pwm input, ISN or RCC controller sending a load limit command.
MANU A L OVERR I DE
If MANUAL OVERRIDE mode is selected, the STATUS display will display this message. This will indicate that the Daily Schedule is being ignored and the chiller will start-up when chilled liquid temperature allows, Remote Contacts, UNIT switch and SYSTEM switches permitting. This is a priority message and cannot be overridden by anti-recycle messages, fault messages, etc. when in the STATUS display mode. Therefore, do not expect to see any other STATUS messages when in the MANUAL OVERRIDE mode. MANUAL OVERRIDE is to only be used in emergencies or for servicing. MANUAL OVERRIDE mode automatically disables itself after 30 minutes.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
S Y S 1 P UM P I N G D OWN S Y S 2 P UM P I N G D OWN
The PUMPING DOWN message indicates that a compressor in the respective system is presently in the process of pumping the system down. When pumpdown is initiated on shutdown, the liquid line solenoid or EEV will close and a compressor will continue to run. When the suction pressure decreases to the suction pressure cutout setpoint or runs for 180 seconds, whichever comes first, the compressor will cycle off.
Fault Safety Status Messages
Safety Status messages appear when safety thresholds in the unit have been exceeded. Safeties are divided into two categories system safeties and unit safeties. System safeties are faults that cause the individual system to be shut down. Unit safeties are faults that cause all running compressors to be shut down. Following are display messages and explanations.
System Safeties
System safeties are faults that cause individual systems to be shut down if a safety threshold is exceeded for 3 seconds. They are auto reset faults in that the system will be allowed to restart automatically after the fault condition is no longer present. However, if 3 faults on the same system occur within 90 minutes, that system will be locked out on the last fault. This condition is then a manual reset. The system switch (under OPTIONS key) must be turned off and then back on to clear the lockout fault. Fault messages will be displayed whenever a system is locked out.
SYS 1 H I GH DSCH PRES SYS 2 H I GH DSCH PRES
The Discharge Pressure Cutout is a software cutout in the microprocessor and is backed-up by a mechanical high pressure cutout switch located in the refrigerant circuit. It ensures that the system pressure does not exceed safe working limits. The system will shutdown when the programmable cutout is exceeded and will be allowed to restart when the discharge pressure falls 40 PSIG below the cutout. Discharge transducers must be installed for this function to operate.
S Y S 1 L OW S U C T P R E S S S Y S 2 L OW S U C T P R E S S
The Suction Pressure Cutout is a software cutout that helps protect the chiller from an evaporator freeze-up should the system attempt to run with a low refrigerant charge or a restriction in the refrigerant circuit.
Repeated starts after resetting a low suction pressure fault will cause evaporator freeze-up. Whenever a system locks out on this safety or any safety, immediate steps should be taken to identify the cause.
At system start, the cutout is set to 10% of programmed value. During the next 3 minutes the cutout point is ramped up to the programmed cutout point. If at any time during these 3 minutes the suction pressure falls below the ramped cutout point, the system will stop. This cutout is completely ignored for the first 30 seconds of system run time to avoid nuisance shutdowns, especially on units that utilize a low pressure switch in place of the suction pressure transducer.
After the first 3 minutes, if the suction pressure falls
below the programmed cutout setting, a "transient
protection routine" is activated. This sets the cutout at
10% of the programmed value and ramps up the cutout
over the next 30 seconds. If at any time during these
30 seconds the suction pressure falls below the ramped cutout, the system will stop.
7
SYS 1 MP / HPCO F AUL T SYS 2 MP / HPCO F AUL T
SYS 1 MP / HPCO I NH I B SYS 2 MP / HPCO I NH I B
The Motor Protector/Mechanical High Pressure Cutout protects the compressor motor from overheating or the system from experiencing dangerously high discharge pressure.
This fault condition is present when CR1 (SYS 1) or CR2 (SYS 2) relays de-energize due to the HP switch or motor protector opening. This causes the respective CR contacts to open causing 0 VDC to be read on the inputs to the microboard. The fault condition is cleared when a 30 VDC signal is restored to the input.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
101
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
The internal motor protector opens between 185°F and 248°F (85°C and 120°C) and auto resets. On 60 Hz chillers, the mechanical HP switch opens at 585 psig plus or minus 10 psig and automatically closes at 440 psig plus or minus 25 psig.
The compressor is also equipped with a discharge temperature sensor for the purpose of sensing internal scroll temperature. This sensor protects the scrolls from overheating due to inadequate cooling that may occur when refrigerant charge is low, or superheat is too high.
When the sensor senses a high temperature, it opens the motor protector circuit in the compressor causing the compressor to shut down.
During the first two faults an MP/HP INHIBIT message will be displayed and the system will not be locked out. Only after the third fault in 90 minutes will the MP/ HPCO FAULT message be displayed.
Whenever the motor protector or discharge sensor shuts down a compressor and the system, the internal compressor contacts will open for a period of 30 minutes to ensure that the motor or scroll temperatures have time to dissipate the heat and cool down. The MP/ HP INHIBIT message will be displayed while these contacts are open or when the HPCO is open. While this message is displayed, the compressors will not be permitted to start.
After 30 minutes, the contacts will close and the system will be permitted to restart. The microprocessor will not try to restart the compressors in a system that shuts down on this safety for a period of 30 minutes to allow the internal compressor to time out.
During the 30 minute timeout, the MP/HPCO INHIB message will be displayed. The MP/HPCO FAULT will only be displayed after 3 shutdowns in 90 minutes, indicating the system is locked out and will not restart.
S Y S S Y S
1 HIGH MTR CURR 2 HIGH MTR CURR
When the SYSTEM CURRENT FEEDBACK option is installed and selected (Option 11 under OPTIONS key Current Feedback), this safety will operate as follows. If the actual feedback voltage of the system proportional to currents exceeds the programmed trip voltage for 5 seconds, the system will shutdown.
102
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
This safety will shut down a system if either suction temperature or suction pressure sensors read out of range high or low. This condition must be present for 3 seconds to cause a system shutdown. The safety locks out a system after the first fault and will not allow automatic restarting.
Unit Safeties Unit safeties are faults that cause all running compressors to be shut down. Unit faults are auto reset faults in that the unit will be allowed to restart automatically after the fault condition is no longer present.
UN I T FAUL T : L OW AMB I E N T T E M P
The Low Ambient Temp Cutout is a Safety Shutdown designed to protect the chiller from operating in a low ambient condition. If the outdoor ambient temperature falls below the programmable cutout, the chiller will shut down. Restart can occur when temperature rises 2°F above the cutoff. This message should not apply to a YCRL chiller
If this message does appear, put the chiller in the LOW AMBIENT mode under the OPTIONS key and program the low ambient cutout to 0.00° F under the PROGRAM key.
UN I T FAUL T : L OW L I Q U I D T E M P
The Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Cutout protects the chiller form an evaporator freeze-up should the chilled liquid temperature drop below the freeze point. This situation could occur under low flow conditions or if the micro panel setpoint values are improperly programmed. Anytime the leaving chilled liquid temperature (water or glycol) drops below the cutout point, the chiller will shutdown. Restart can occur when chilled liquid temperature rises 2°F above the cutout.
UN I T FAUL T : 1 1 5 VAC UNDER VOL T AGE
The Under Voltage Safety ensures that the system is not operated at voltages where malfunction of the microprocessor could result in system damage. When the 115 VAC to the micro panel drops below a certain level, a unit fault is initiated to safely shut down the unit. Restart is allowed after the unit is fully powered again and the anti-recycle timers have finished counting down.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
UNIT FAULT: HIGH MTR CURR
When the CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER UNIT option is selected under the OPTIONS key, the unit will shut down when the voltage exceeds the programmed trip voltage for 5 seconds.
The trip voltage is programmed at the factory according to compressor or unit RLA.
Restart will occur after the anti-recycle timer times out.
Unit Warning The following messages are not unit safeties and will not be logged to the history buffer. They are unit warnings and will not auto-restart. Operator intervention is required to allow a restart of the chiller.
! ! L OW B A T T E R Y ! ! CHECK PROG / S E T P / OP T N
The Low Battery Warning can only occur at unit power-up. On micro panel power-up, the RTC battery is checked. If a low battery is found, all programmed setpoints, program values, options, time, schedule, and
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
history buffers will be lost. These values will all be reset to their default values which may not be the desired operating values. Once a faulty battery is detected, the unit will be prevented from running until the PROGRAM key is pressed. Once PROGRAM is pressed the anti-recycle timers will be set to the programmed anti-recycle time to allow the operator time to check setpoints, and if necessary, reprogram programmable values and options.
If a low battery is detected, it should be replaced as soon as possible. The programmed values will all be lost and the unit will be prevented from running on the next power interruption. The RTC/battery (031-02565000) is located at U17 on the microboard.
I N C O R R E C T UNIT TYPE
This indicates the condensing unit jumper is installed on J11-12. This jumper must be removed to operate the chiller.
7
JOHNSON CONTROLS
103
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
Status Key Messages
STATUS KEY MESSAGES
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
General Messages
Unit Switch Off Shutdown
Remote Controlled Shutdown
Daily Schedule Shutdown
System Safeties
Fault Messages
Unit Safeties and Warning Messages
System X High Disch Pressure
Low Ambient Temp
System X Low Suct Pressure
Low Liquid Temp
Flow Switch/Rem Stop No Run Permissive
System X MP/HPCO Inhibit
115VAC Undervoltage
System X Switch Off
System X MP/HPCO Fault
System X No Cooling load
System X Comps Run
System X HIGH MTR CURR (Optional)
System X AR Timer System X AC Timer System X Disch Limiting
System X Suction Limiting
System X Percentage Load Limiting
Manual Overide Status
System X Pumping Down (on shutdown)
Figure 31 - STATUS KEY MESSAGES QUICK REFERENCE LIST 104
Low Battery Check Prog/Step/Optn (Unit Warning Message)
Incorrect Unit Type (Unit Warning Message)
High Motor Current
LD11297A
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
DISPLAY/PRINT KEYS
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
The DISPLAY/PRINT keys allow the user to retrieve system and unit information that is useful for monitoring chiller operation, diagnosing potential problems, troubleshooting, and commissioning the chiller.
System and unit information, unit options, setpoints, and scheduling can also be printed out with the use of a printer. Both real-time and history information are available.
Oper Data Key
The OPER DATA key gives the user access to unit and system operating parameters. When the OPER DATA key is pressed, system parameters will be displayed and remain on the display until another key is pressed. After pressing the OPER DATA key, the various operating data screens can be scrolled through by using the (UP) and (DOWN) arrow keys or the ENTER/ADV key located under the "ENTRY" section.
System 2 information will only be displayed for 2 system units.
00067VIP
With the "UNIT TYPE" set as a liquid chiller (no jumper to J11-12), the following list of operating data screens are viewable under the OPER DATA key in the order that they are displayed. The (DOWN) arrow key scrolls through the displays in the order they appear below:
The chiller MUST be set to be a liquid 7
chiller (no jumper to J11-12). DO NOT operate the chiller if not properly set up.
LCHL T = 4 6 . 2 ° F RCHL T = 5 7 . 4 ° F °
This display shows chilled leaving and return liquid temperatures. The minimum limit on the display for these parameters are 2.2°F (-19°C). The maximum limit on the display is 140°F (60°C).
AMB I E N T A I R T EMP = 87 . 5°F
This display shows the ambient air temperature. The minimum limit on the display is 0.4°F (-17.6°C). The maximum display is 131.2°F (55.1°C).
JOHNSON CONTROLS
105
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
S YS X SP = 7 2 . 1 PS I G DP = 2 2 7 . 0 PS I G
These displays show suction and discharge pressures for each system. The discharge pressure transducer is optional on some models.
If the optional discharge transducer is not installed, the discharge pressure would display 0 psig (0 barg).
The minimum limits for the display are:
· Suction Pressure: 0 psig (0 barg)
· Discharge Pressure: 0 psig (0 barg)
The maximum limits for the display are:
· Suction Pressure: 400 psig (27.58 barg)
· Discharge Pressure: 650 psig (44.82 barg)
SY S X H O U R S 1 = X X X X X 2 = X X X X X, 3 = X X X X X
SYS X S TART S 1 = XXXXX 2 = X X X X X, 3 = X X X X X
The above two messages will appear sequentially for each system. The first display shows accumulated running hours of each compressor for the specific system. The second message shows the number of starts for each compressor on each system.
Run times and starts will only be displayed for the actual number of systems and compressors on the unit.
A total of 99,999 hours and starts can be logged before the counter rolls over to "0".
LOAD T I MER UNLOAD T I MER
58 SEC 0 SEC
COOL I NG DEMAND 2 OF 8 STEPS
The display of COOLING DEMAND indicates the current "step" in the capacity control scheme when in Return Water Control Mode. The number of available steps are determined by how many compressors are in the unit. In the above display, the "2" does not mean that two compressor are running but only indicates that the capacity control scheme is on step 2 of 8. Capacity Control is covered in more detail in this publication which provides specific information on compressor staging (for Return Water Control only).
T EMP ERROR XXX . X ° F
T EMP RAT E
XXX . X ° F / M
The COOLING DEMAND message will be replaced with this message when Leaving Chilled liquid control is selected. This message indicates the temperature error and the rate of change of the chilled liquid temperature.
L EAD SYS T EM I S S Y S T EM NUMBER 2
This display indicates the current LEAD system. In this example system 2 is the LEAD system, making system 1 the LAG system. The LEAD system can be manually selected or automatic. See the programming under the Options Key on Page 121. The Lead System display will only appear on a two system unit.
A unit utilizing Hot Gas Bypass should be programmed for MANUAL with system 1 as the lead system. Failure to do so will prevent hot gas operation if system 2 switches to the lead system when programmed for AUTOMATIC LEAD/LAG.
This display of the load and unload timers indicate the time in seconds until the unit can load or unload. Whether the systems loads or unloads is determined by how far the actual liquid temperature is from setpoint. A detailed description of unit loading and unloading is covered under the topic of Capacity Control.
106
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
E VAPORATOR HEAT ER
S TATUS I S
= X X X
This display indicates the status of the evaporator heater. The evaporator heater is controlled by ambient air temperature. When the ambient temperature drops below 40 °F the heater is turned ON. When the temperature rises above 45 °F the heater is turned off. An under voltage condition will keep the heater off until full voltage is restored to the system.
E V A POR A T OR WA T E R
P UMP
S T A T U S
= X X XX
The evaporator pump dry contacts are energized when any compressor is running, or the unit is not OFF on the Daily Schedule and the UNIT switch is ON, or the unit has shutdown on a Low Leaving Chilled Liquid fault. However, even if one of above is true, the pump will not run if the micro panel has been powered up for less than 30 seconds or if the pump has run in the last 30 seconds to prevent pump motor overheating.
E V AP PUMP TOT A L RUN
H O U R S
= X X X X X
The Evaporator Pump Total Run Hours display indicates the total pump run hours. Total hours continually increments similar to Compressor Run Hours. If dual pumps are fitted, run hours indicates total hours on both pumps.
AC T I V E R EMO T E C T R L N O N E
There are several types of remote systems that can be used to control or monitor the unit. The following messages indicate the type of remote control mode active:
· NONE no remote control active. Remote monitoring may be via ISN.
· ISN YORK Talk via ISN allows remote load limiting and temperature reset through an ISN system.
· LOAD LIM Load limiting enabled using contact closure.
· PWM TEMP EMS temperature reset
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
If the microprocessor is programmed for CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER UNIT under the OPTIONS key, the display will show up as the first display prior to the SYS 1 displays. Total chiller current is displayed as shown below:
UN I T
AMPS = 54.0 VOLTS = 1.2
If the microprocessor is programmed for CURRENT FEEDBACK NONE, no current display will appear.
S Y S X COMP S T A T U S 1=XXX 2=XXX 3=XXX
SYS X RUN
T I ME
XX - XX - XX - XX D - H -M- S
SYS X L L SV I S ON HOT GAS SOL I S OF F
SYS X FAN STAGE 3
SYS X AMPS = 36.0 VOLTS = 0.8
The preceding five messages will appear sequentially,
first for system 1, then for system 2.
7
The first message indicates the system and the associ-
ated compressors which are running.
The second message indicates the system run time in days hours minutes seconds. Note that this is not accumulated run time but pertains only to the current system cycle.
The third message indicates the system, and whether the liquid line solenoid or EEV pilot solenoid and hot gas solenoid are being turned on by the microboard. Note that hot gas is not available for system 2, so there is no message pertaining to the hot gas solenoid when system 2 message is displayed.
The fourth message indicates the stage of condenser fan operation that is active. This message does not apply to a YCRL chiller and is displayed as a result of the use of software common to YCA, YCRL and YCW chillers.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
107
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
See Condenser Fan Control in SECTION 8 UNIT OPERATION for more information.
The fifth message displays current as sensed by the optional current feedback circuitry. The display reads out in amps along with the DC feedback voltage from the module. Current is calculated by:
225A · Actual Volts 5 Volts
Individual displays will be present for each system, if CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER SYSTEM is programmed under the OPTIONS key. Combined compressor current for each system is displayed.
Oper Data Quick Reference List The following figure is a quick reference list for information available under the OPER DATA key.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Oper Data Key
Leaving and Chilled Liquid Temps Ambient Air Temperature
System 1 Discharge and Suction Pressure
*System X Accumulated Hours *System X Accumulated Starts
Load and Unload Timers Cooling Demand Steps (Return Chilled Liquid Control Only) Temp Rate and Temp Error (Leaving Chilled Liquid Control Only) Lead System Indicator Evaporator Heater Status
Evaporator Water Pump Status
Active Remote Control Current Feedback One Per Unit *System X Compressors Status
*System X Run Time *Sys X LLSV and HGSV Status *System X Condenser Fan Stage (This message is not applicable
to a YCRL chiller.) Current Feedback One Per System
* Block of information repeats for each system
LD12585B
Figure 32 - OPERATION DATA
108
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Print Key
The PRINT key allows the operator to obtain a printout of real-time system operating data or a history printout of system data at the "instant of the fault" on the last six faults which occurred on the unit. An optional printer is required for the printout.
Operating Data Printout
Pressing the PRINT key and then OPER DATA key allows the operator to obtain a printout of current system operating parameters. When the OPER DATA key is pressed, a snapshot will be taken of system operating conditions and panel programming selections. This data will be temporarily stored in memory and transmission of this data will begin to the printer. A sample Operating Data Printout is shown below. (Note: Not all values are printed for all models. Not all data applies to a YCRL chiller.)
YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION MILLENNIUM LIQUID CHILLER
UNIT STATUS 2:04PM 01 JAN 10
SYS 1 SYS 2
NO COOLING LOAD COMPRESSORS RUNNING 2
OPTIONS
CHILLED LIQUID
WATER
AMBIENT CONTROL
STANDARD
LOCAL/REMOTE MODE
REMOTE
CONTROL MODE
LEAVING LIQUID
LEAD/LAG CONTROL
AUTOMATIC
FAN CONTROL
AMB & DSCH PRESS
CURRENT FEEDBACK
NONE
POWER FAILURE RESTART AUTOMATIC
SOFT START
ENABLED
EXPANSION VALVE
THERMOSTATIC
REMOTE TEMP RESET
4 TO 20MA
PROGRAM VALUES
DSCH PRESS CUTOUT
570 PSIG
SUCT PRESS CUTOUT
80 PSIG
SUCT PRESS CUT COOLING 42 PSIG
SUCT PRESS CUT HEATING 31 PSIG
LOW AMBIENT CUTOUT
25.0 DEGF
LEAVING LIQUID CUTOUT 25.0 DEGF
ANTI RECYCLE TIME
600 SECS
FAN CONTROL ON PRESS 425 PSIG
FAN DIFF OFF PRESS
125 PSIG
NUMBER OF COMPRESSORS
6
NUMBER OF FANS PER SYSTEM
4
UNIT TRIP VOLTS
3.0
REFRIGERANT TYPE
R-22
DEFROST INIT TEMP
41.0 DEGF
DEFROST INITIATION TIME 60MIN
DEFROST TERMINATION TIME 3MIN
BIVALENT HEAT DELAY TIME 30 MIN
REMOTE UNIT ID PROGRAMMED
2
YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS 1 (410a)
PUMP TOTAL RUN HOURS XXXXX (410a)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
UNIT DATA
RETURN LIQUID TEMP
58.2 DEGF
LEAVING LIQUID TEMP
53.0 DEGF
DISCHARGE AIR TEMP
55.3 DEGF
COOLING RANGE 42.0 +/- 2.0 DEGF
HEATING RANGE 122.0 +/- 2.0 DEGF
SYS 1 SETPOINT
70 +/- 3 PSIG
SYS 2 SETPOINT
70 +/- 3 PSIG
REMOTE SETPOINT
44.0 DEGF
AMBIENT AIR TEMP
74.8 DEGF
LEAD SYSTEM
SYS 2
EVAPORATOR PUMP
ON
EVAPORATOR HEATER
OFF
ACTIVE REMOTE CONTROL
NONE
LAST DEFROST SYS X DURATION XXXS
TIME TO SYS X DEFROST
XX MIN
BIVALENT DELAY REMAINING XX MIN
UNIT XXX.X AMPS
X.X VOLTS
SOFTWARE VERSION
C.M02.13.00
SYSTEM 1 DATA
COMP STATUS 1=OFF 2=OFF 3=OFF
RUN TIME
0- 0- 0- 0 D-H-M-S
TIME YYYYYYY 0- 0- 0- 0 D-H-M-S
LAST STATE
YYYYYYY
SUCTION PRESSURE
105 PSIG
DISCHARGE PRESSURE
315 PSIG
SUCTION TEMPERATURE 46.0 DEGF
SAT SUCTION TEMP
34.0 DEGF
SUCTION SUPERHEAT
12.0 DEGF
COOLER INLET REFRIG 31.6 DEGF
DEFROST TEMPERATURE 52.8 DEGF
LIQUID LINE SOLENOID
OFF
MODE SOLENOID
OFF
HOT GAS BYPASS VALVE
OFF
CONDENSER FAN STAGE
OFF
EEV OUTPUT
0.0 %
SYSTEM
XXX.X AMPS X.X VOLTS
7
SYSTEM 2 DATA
COMP STATUS 1=ON, 2=OFF, 3=ON
RUN TIME
0-0-1-46 D-H-M-S
TIME YYYYYYY 0-0-0-0 D-H-M-S
LAST STATE
YYYYYYY
SUCTION PRESSURE
110 PSIG
DISCHARGE PRESSURE
320 PSIG
SUCTION TEMPERATURE 49.3 DEGF
SAT SUCTION TEMP
36.0 DEGF
SUCTION SUPERHEAT
13.3 DEGF
COOLER INLET REFRIG 31.6 DEGF
DEFROST TEMPERATURE 52.8 DEGF
LIQUID LINE SOLENOID
ON
MODE SOLENOID
ON
CONDENSER FAN STAGE
3
EEV OUTPUT
63.2%
SYSTEM XXX.X AMPS X.X VOLTS
DAILY SCHEDULE
S M T W T F S
*=HOLIDAY
SUN START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
MON START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
TUE START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
WED START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
THU START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
FRI START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
SAT START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
HOL START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
109
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
See Service And Troubleshooting section for printer installation information.
History Printout
Pressing the PRINT key and then the HISTORY key allows the operator to obtain a printout of information relating to the last nine Safety Shutdowns which occurred. The information is stored at the instant of the fault, regardless of whether the fault caused a lockout to occur. The information is also not affected by power failures (long-term internal memory battery backup is built into the circuit board) or manual resetting of a fault lock-out.
When the HISTORY key is pressed, a printout is transmitted of all system operating conditions which were stored at the "instant the fault occurred" for each of the nine Safety Shutdowns buffers. The printout will begin with the most recent fault which occurred. The most recent fault will always be stored as Safety Shutdown No. 1. identically formatted fault information will then be printed for the remaining Safety Shutdowns.
Information contained in the Safety Shutdown buffers is very important when attempting to troubleshoot a system problem. This data reflects the system conditions at the instant the fault occurred and often reveals other system conditions which actually caused the safety threshold to be exceeded.
The history printout is similar to the operational data printout shown in the previous section. The differences are in the header and the schedule information. The Daily Schedule is not printed in a history print.
One example history buffer printout is shown following. The data part of the printout will be exactly the same as the operational data print so it is not repeated here. The difference is that the Daily Schedule is not printed in the history print and the header will be as follows.
YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION MILLENNIUM LIQUID CHILLER
SAFETY SHUTDOWN NUMBER 1 SHUTDOWN @ 3:56PM 01 JAN 10
SYS 1 HIGH DSCH PRESS SHUTDOWN
SYS 2
NO FAULTS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
History Displays
The HISTORY key gives the user access to many unit and system operating parameters at the time of a unit or system Safety Shutdown. When the HISTORY key is pressed the following message is displayed.
D I S P L A Y S A F E T Y S H U TD OWN N O . 1 ( 1 TO 9 )
While this message is displayed, the (UP) arrow key can be used to select any of the six history buffers. Buffer number 1 is the most recent, and buffer number 6 is the oldest Safety Shutdown that was saved.
After selecting the shutdown number, pressing the ENTER key displays the following message which shows when the shutdown occurred.
S H U T D OWN O C C U R R E D 0 3 : 5 6 PM 2 9 J AN 0 2
The (UP) and (DOWN) arrow keys are used to scroll forward and backward through the history buffer to display the shutdown conditions stored at the instant the fault occurred. The (DOWN) arrow key scrolls through the displays in the order they appear below:
UN I T FAUL T :
L OW
L I QU I D T EMP
Displays the type of fault that occurred.
UN I T TY PE L I QU I D CH I L L ER
Displays the type of chiller; Liquid, Condensing Unit or Heat Pump.
CH I L L ED L I QU I D X X X X X
Displays the chilled liquid type; Water or Glycol.
AMB I E N T CON T RO L X X X X X X X X X X
Displays the type of Ambient Control; Standard or Low Ambient. This does not apply to a YCRL chiller.
L O C A L / R E M O T E MO D E X X X X X X X X X
Displays Local or Remote control selection.
110
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
CON T RO L MOD E L EAV I NG L I QU I D
Displays the type of chilled liquid control; Leaving or Return.
L EAD / L AG CON T ROL X X X X X X X X
Displays the type of lead/lag control; Manual System 1, Manual System 2 or Automatic. This is only selectable on 2-system chillers.
F A N CO N T R O L D I S C H A RG E PR E S S U R E
This message does not apply to a YCRL chiller.
MANU A L OV E RR I D E MOD E X X X X X X X X X
Displays whether Manual Override was Enabled or Disabled.
CURRENT FEEDBACK X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Displays type of Current Feedback utilized.
SOFT START X X X X X X X
Displays whether the optional European Soft Start was installed and selected.
D I SCHARGE PRESSURE CUTOUT = XXXX PS I G
Displays the programmed Discharge Pressure Cutout.
SUCT I ON PRESSURE CUTOUT = XXXX PS I G
Displays the programmed Suction Pressure Cutout.
L OW AMB I E N T T E M P CUTOUT = XXX . X ° F
Displays the programmed Low Ambient Cutout.
L E AV I NG L I QU I D TEMP CUTOUT = XXX . X ° F
Displays the Leaving Liquid Temp. Cutout programmed.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
F AN CONTROL ON PRESSURE=XXX PS I G
This message does not apply to a YCRL chiller.
F A N D I F F E R E N T I A L OFF P R E S S UR E = PS I G
This message does not apply to a YCRL chiller.
SYS 1 TRIP VOLTS = X . X VOLTS
Displays the programmed High Current Trip Voltage.
SYS 2 TRIP VOLTS = X . X VOLTS
Displays the programmed High Current Trip Voltage.
Y O R K
H Y D R O
K I T PUMP S
= X
Indicates the Pump Control option is selected.
LCHL T = XXX . X ° F RCHL T = XXX . X ° F
Displays the Leaving and Return chilled Liquid Tem-
perature at the time of the fault.
7
SET PO I NT = XXX . X ° F RANGE = + / - ° F
Displays the programmed Setpoint and Range, if the chiller is programmed for Leaving Chilled Liquid Control.
SET PO I NT = XXX . X ° F RANGE = + XX . X ° F
Displays the programmed Setpoint and Range, if the chiller is programmed for Return Chilled Liquid Control.
AMB I E N T A I R T EMP = XXX . X ° F
Displays the Ambient Temp. at the time of the fault.
L EAD SYS T EM I S S Y S T EM NUMBER X
Displays which system is in the lead at the time of the fault.
111
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
E VAPORATOR HEAT ER
S TATUS I S
X X X
Displays status of the Evaporator Heater at the time of the fault.
E V A POR A T OR WA T E R
P UMP S T AT US
X X X X
Displays status of Evaporator Water Pump at the time of fault. Status may read ON, OFF or TRIP.
E V AP PUMP TOT A L RUN
H OURS
= X X X X
Evap Pump total run hours at the time of fault.
AC T I V E R EMO T E C T R L X X X X
Displays whether Remote Chiller Control was active when the fault occurred.
UN I T AC T UA L AMP S = X X X . X AMP S
This is only displayed when the Current Feedback Option is one per unit.
S Y S X COMP
S T A T U S
1=XXX 2=XXX 3=XXX
Displays which Compressors were running in the system when the fault occurred.
SYS X RUN T I ME XX - XX - XX - XX D - H -M- S
Displays the system run time when the fault occurred.
S YS X SP = XXXX PS I G DP = XXXX PS I G
Displays the system Suction and Discharge Pressure of the time of the fault.
S YS X SUCT = XXX . X ° F SAT SUCT = XXX . X ° F
Displays the System Suction Temp and Saturated Suction Temp when an EEV is installed.
S Y S
X LLSV
HOT GAS SOL
I S XXX I S XXX
Displays whether the System Liquid Line Solenoid or Hot Gas Solenoid was energized at the time of the fault.
S YS X F AN S T AGE X X X
This message does not apply to a YCRL chiller.
S Y S X AC T U A L A M P S = X X X . X AMP S
Displays the system Amperage (calculated approximately) at the time of the fault.
For this message to appear, CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER SYSTEM must be programmed under the OPTIONS key. If the microprocessor is programmed as one CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER UNIT under the PROGRAM key, the display will be the first display prior to the SYS 1 info. If the microprocessor is programmed for CURRENT FEEDBACK NONE, no current display will appear.
Displays for System 1 starting with SYS X NUMBER OF COMPS RUNNING X through SYS X AMPS = XXX.X VOLTS = X.X will be displayed first, followed by displays for System 2.
Further explanation of the above displays is covered under the STATUS, OPER DATA, COOLING SETPOINTS, PROGRAM, and OPTIONS keys.
Software Version
The software version may be viewed by first pressing the HISTORY key and then repeatedly pressing the (DOWN) arrow key until you scroll past the first history buffer choice.
D I SPLAY SAFETY SHUT D OWN N O . 1 ( 1 T O 6 )
After the (DOWN) arrow key is pressed again, the software version will appear.
C ONTROL I /O
C. M X X. Z Z. Y Y C. M X X. 1 8. Y Y
112
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
ENTRY KEYS
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
00068VIP
The ENTRY keys allow the user to view, change programmed values. The ENTRY keys consist of an (UP) arrow key, (DOWN) arrow key, and an ENTER/ADV key.
Up and Down Arrow Keys
Used in conjunction with the OPER DATA, HISTORY, COOLING SETPOINTS, SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY, OPTIONS and CLOCK keys, the (UP) and (DOWN) arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the various data screens. See the section on DISPLAY/ PRINT keys for specific information on the displayed information and specific use of the (UP) and (DOWN) arrow keys.
The (UP) arrow key, and (DOWN) arrow key are also used for programming the control panel such as changing numerical or text values when programming
Cooling Setpoints, setting the Daily Schedule, changing safety Setpoints, Chiller Options, and setting the clock.
Enter/Adv Key
7
The ENTER/ADV key must be pushed after any change is made to the Cooling Setpoints, Daily Schedule, Safety Setpoints, Chiller Options, and the clock. Pressing this key "enters" the new values into memory. If the ENTER/ADV key is not pressed after a value is changed, the changes will not be "entered" and the original values will be used to control the chiller.
Programming and a description on the use of the (UP) arrow key, and (DOWN) arrow, and ENTER/ADV keys are covered in detail under the SETPOINTS, and UNIT keys.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
113
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
SETPOINTS KEYS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
00069VIP
Programming of the Cooling Setpoints, Daily Schedule, and Safeties is accomplished by using the keys located under the "Setpoints" section.
The three keys involved are labeled COOLING SETPOINTS, SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY, and PROGRAM.
Following are instructions for programming the respective setpoints. The same instruction should be used to view the setpoints with the exception that the setpoint will not be changed.
Cooling Setpoints
The Cooling Setpoint and Range can be programmed by pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS key. The cooling mode (leaving chilled liquid or return chilled liquid) will be displayed for a few seconds, and the setpoint display entry screen will appear.
Leaving Chilled Liquid Control
SET PO I NT = 4 5 . 0 ° F R A N G E = +/- 2 . 0 ° F
The above message shows the current chilled water temperature SETPOINT at 45.0°F (notice the cursor positioned under the number 0). Pressing either the (UP) or (DOWN) arrow will change the setpoint in 0.5°F increments. After using the (UP) or (DOWN) arrow keys to adjust to the desired setpoint, the ENTER/ADV key must be pressed to enter this number into memory and advance to the RANGE SETPOINT.
Entry of the setpoint will be indicated by the cursor moving under the current RANGE setpoint. The (UP) and (DOWN) arrow keys are used to set the RANGE, in 0.5°F increments, to the desired RANGE setpoint. After adjusting the setpoint, the ENTER/ADV key must be pressed to enter the data into memory.
114
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Notice that the RANGE was programmed for +/X.X°F. This indicates the SETPOINT to be in the center of the control range. If the control mode has been programmed for RETURN LIQUID control, the message below would be displayed in place of the previous message.
When in Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Control, the microprocessor will attempt to control the leaving water temperature within the temperature range of the setpoint plus or minus the range. In the above example, control will be in the range of 43°F to 47°F.
Return Chilled Liquid Control
SET PO I NT = 4 5 . 0 ° F RANGE = + 1 0 . 0 ° F
In Return Chilled Liquid Control, the range no longer has a +/- X.X°F, but only a + X.X°F RANGE setpoint. This indicates that the setpoint is not centered within the RANGE but could be described as the bottom of the control range. A listing of the limits and the programmable values for the Cooling Setpoints are shown in Table 14 on page 116.
The SETPOINT and RANGE displays just described were based on LOCAL control. If the unit was programmed for REMOTE control (under the OPTIONS key), the above programmed setpoints would have no effect.
When in Return Chilled Liquid Temperature Control, the microprocessor will turn all compressors off at setpoint and will turn compressors on as return chilled liquid temperature rises. All compressors will be ON at setpoint plus the range. If the range equals the temperature drop across the evaporator when fully loaded, the leaving chilled liquid temperature will remain near the setpoint plus or minus a few degrees as the chiller loads and unloads according to return chilled liquid temperature.
Both LEAVING and RETURN control are described in detail under the Capacity Control on Page 127.
Remote Setpoint Control
Pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS key a second time will display the remote setpoint and cooling range. This display automatically updates about every 2 seconds. Notice that these setpoints are not "locally" programmable, but are controlled by a remote device such as an ISN control, remote reset option board, or remote PWM signal. These setpoints would only be valid if the unit was operating in the REMOTE mode.
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
The following messages illustrate both Leaving Chilled Liquid Control and Return Chilled Liquid Control respectively.
REM SE T P = 4 4 . 0 ° F RANGE = + / - 2 . 0 ° F
(Leaving Chilled Liquid Control)
REM SE T P = 4 4 . 0 ° F R A N G E = +10 . 0 ° F
(Return Chilled Liquid Control) The low limit, high limit, and default values for the keys under "SETPOINTS" are listed in Table 14 on page 116.
Pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS a third time will bring up the display that allows the Maximum EMSPWM Temperature Reset to be programmed. This message is shown below.
M A X E M S - PWM R E MO T E T EMP RESE T = + 2 0 ° F
The Temp Reset value is the maximum allowable remote reset of the temperature setpoint. The setpoint can be reset upwards by the use of an Energy Management System or from the Temperature Reset Option Board. See EMS-PWM Remote Temperature Reset on Page 132 for a detailed explanation of this feature.
As with the other setpoints, the (UP) arrow and 7
(DOWN) arrow keys are used to change the Temp Reset value. After using the (UP) and (DOWN) arrows to adjust to the desired setpoint, the ENTER/ADV key must be pressed to enter this number into memory.
Schedule/Advance Day Key The SCHEDULE is a seven day Daily Schedule that allows one start/stop time per day. The schedule can be programmed Monday through Sunday with an alternate Holiday schedule available. If no start/stop times are programmed, the unit will run on demand, providing the chiller is not shut off on a unit or system shutdown. The Daily Schedule is considered "not programmed" when the times in the schedule are all zeros (00:00 AM).
To set the schedule, press the SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY key. The display will immediately show the following display.
MON S T AR T = 0 0 : 0 0 AM S T OP = 0 0 : 0 0 AM
JOHNSON CONTROLS
115
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Table 14 - COOLING SETPOINTS, PROGRAMMABLE LIMITS AND DEFAULTS
SETPOINTS KEY
MODE
LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT DEFAULT
Leaving Chilled Liquid Setpoint
Water Cooling Glycol Cooling
40.0°F 4.4°C *10.0°F -12.2°C
**70.0°F 21.1°C **70.0°F 21.1°C
44.0°F 6.7°C 44.0°F 6.7°C
Leaving Chilled Liquid Control Range
--
1.5°F 0.8°C
2.5°F 1.4°C
2.0°F 1.1°C
Return Chilled Liquid Setpoint
Water Cooling Glycol Cooling
40.0°F 4.4°C 10.0°F -12.2°C
70.0°F 21.1°C 70.0°F 21.1°C
44.0°F 6.7°C 44.0°F 6.7°C
Return Chilled Liquid Control Range
--
4.0°F 2.2 °C
20.0°F 11.1°C
10.0°F 5.6°C
Max Ems-Pwm Remote Temperature Reset
--
2°F 1.1°C
40°F 22.2°C
20°F 11.1°C
* Refer to Engineering Guide for operation below 30°F (-1.1°C). Alternate thermal expansion valves must be used below 30°F (-1.1°C).
* When using glycol, Leaving Chilled Liquid Setpoint should not be set below 20°F (-6.7°C). ** Do not exceed 55°F (12.8°C) setpoint before contacting the nearest Johnson Controls Office for application guidelines.
The line under the 0 is the cursor. If the value is wrong, it may be changed by using the (UP) and (DOWN) arrow keys until correct. Pressing the ENTER/ADV key will enter the times and then move the cursor to the minute box. The operation is then repeated if necessary. This process may be followed until the hour, minutes, and meridian (AM or PM) of both the START and STOP points are set. After changing the meridian of the stop time, pressing the ENTER/ADV key will advance the schedule to the next day.
Whenever the Daily Schedule is changed for Monday, all the other days will change to the new Monday schedule. This means if the Monday times are not applicable for the whole week then the exceptional days would need to be reprogrammed to the desired schedule.
To page to a specific day, press the SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY key until the desired day appears. The start and stop time of each day may be programmed differently using the (UP) and (DOWN) arrow, and ENTER/ADV keys.
After SUN (Sunday) schedule appears on the display a subsequent press of the SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY key will display the Holiday schedule. This is a two part display. The first reads:
HO L S T AR T = 0 0 : 0 0 AM S T OP = 0 0 : 0 0 AM
The times may be set using the same procedure as described above for the days of the week. After changing the meridian of the stop time, pressing the ENTER/ADV key will advance the schedule to the following display:
S __ M T W T F S HOL I DAY NOT ED BY *
The line below the empty space next to the S is the cursor and will move to the next empty space when the ENTER/ADV key is pressed. To set the Holiday, the cursor is moved to the space following the day of the week of the Holiday and the (UP) arrow key is pressed. An * will appear in the space signifying that day as a Holiday. The * can be removed by pressing the (DOWN) arrow key.
116
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
The Holiday schedule must be programmed weekly. Once the Holiday schedule runs, it will revert to the normal Daily Schedule.
Program Key
There are several operating parameters under the PROGRAM key that are programmable. These setpoints can be changed by pressing the PROGRAM key, and then the ENTER/ADV key to enter Program Mode. Continuing to press the ENTER/ADV key will display each operating parameter. While a particular parameter is being displayed, the (UP) and (DOWN) arrow keys can be used to change the value. After the value is changed, the ENTER/ADV key must be pressed to enter the data into memory. Table 15 on page 119 shows the programmable limits and default values for each operating parameter.
Following are the displays for the programmable values in the order they appear:
d D I SCHARGE CUTOUT =
P R E S S U R E 5 7 0 PS I G
DISCHARGE PRESSURE CUTOUT is the discharge pressure at which the system will shutdown as monitored by the optional discharge transducer. This is a software shutdown that acts as a backup for the mechanical high pressure switch located in the refrigerant circuit. The system can restart when the discharge pressure drops 40 psig (2.76 barg) below the cutout point.
If the optional discharge pressure transducer is not installed, this programmable safety would not apply. It should be noted that every system has a mechanical high pressure cutout that protects against excessive high discharge pressure regardless of whether or not the optional discharge pressure is installed.
SUCT I ON PRESSURE C U T O U T = 80 . 0 P S I G
The SUCTION PRESSURE CUTOUT protects the chiller from an evaporator freeze-up. If the suction pressure drops below the cutout point, the system will shut down. Typically, the cutout should be set to 80 psig (5.52 bar) form water cooling.
There are some exceptions when the suction pressure is permitted to temporarily drop below the cutout point. Details are explained under the System Safeties topic.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
L OW AMB I E N T T E M P CUTOUT = 2 5 . 0 ° F
The LOW AMBIENT TEMP CUTOUT allows the user to select the chiller outside ambient temperature cutout point. If the ambient falls below this point, the chiller will shut down. Restart can occur when temperature rises 2°F (1.11°C) above the cutout setpoint. This does not apply to a YCRL chiller.
L EAV I NG L I QU I D T EMP CUTOUT = 3 6 . 0 ° F
The LEAVING LIQUID TEMP CUTOUT protects the chiller from an evaporator freeze-up. Anytime the leaving chilled liquid temperature drops to the cutout point, the chiller shuts down. Restart will be permitted when the leaving chilled liquid temperature rises 2°F (1.11°C) above the cutout setpoint.
When water cooling mode is programmed (OPTIONS key), the value is fixed at 36.0°F (2.22°C) and cannot be changed. Glycol cooling mode can be programmed to values listed in Table 15 on page 119.
ANT I RECYCL E T I MER = 6 0 0 SEC
The programmable anti-recycle timer ensures that sys-
tems do not short cycle, and the compressor motors have sufficient time to dissipate heat after a start. This timer is
7
programmable under the PROGRAM key between 300
seconds and 600 seconds. Whenever possible, to reduce
cycling and motor heating, the anti-recycle timer should
be adjusted as high as possible. The programmable anti-
recycle timer starts the timer when the first compressor
in a system starts. The timer begins to count down. If all
the compressors in the circuit cycle off, a compressor
within the circuit will not be permitted to start until the
anti-recycle timer has timed out. If the lead system has
run for less than 5 minutes, three times in a row, the anti-
recycle timer will be extended to 10 minutes, if currently
programmed for less than 10 minutes.
F AN CONTROL ON P R E S S UR E = XX X P S I G
Does not apply to YCRL.
F AN D I F F ERENT I AL OF F PR E S S U R E = XX X P S I G
Does not apply to YCRL.
117
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
TOT A L NUMBER OF COMP R E S SOR S = 6
The TOTAL NUMBER OF COMPRESSORS is the total quantity of compressors in the chiller, and determines the stages of cooling available. Dual system units may have 4 or 6 compressors.
This MUST be programmed correctly to ensure proper chiller operation.
N UMBER OF F ANS
P ER SYS T EM
= X
Does not apply to a YCRL chiller.
SYS X TRIP VOLTS = X. X V O L T S
U N I T
TRIP VOLTS = X. X V O L T S
A single system chiller MUST have a jumper between terminals J9-7 and +24V on the I/O board. This connection can be made between terminals 13 and 17 on terminal block CTB1. If the jumper is not installed, the unit will act as a 2-system chiller. The jumper is only checked by the microprocessor at unit power-up. If the jumper is removed, power must be removed and re-applied to register the change in memory.
This MUST be programmed correctly to ensure proper chiller operation.
Depending on the option, the trip voltage for a specific system or unit high current trip can be programmed. It also calibrates the current readout under the OPER DATA key. The approximate programmed value is calculated using the following formulas:
System Trip Volts For individual system high current trip programming on chillers:
· Add the sum of the compressor and fan RLA's in the system.
· Multiply the sum by 1.25.
· Divide by 225 A.
· The resulting voltage is the value that should be programmed.
For example, if fan and compressor RLA's total 100 A:
5 V x 100 A 225 A
x
1.25 =
625 VA 225 A
=
2.8 V
The programmed value will be 2.8 V. A similar calculation and programming will be necessary for the other system in a 2-system chiller.
118
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Unit Trip Volts
For total chiller high current trip programming on 460VAC chillers:
· Add the sum of all the compressor and fan RLA's in the chiller.
· Multiply the sum by 1.25.
· Divide by 225 A.
· The resulting voltage is the value that should be programmed.
For example, if fan and compressor RLA's total 180 A:
5 V x 180 A 225 A
x
1.25 =
1125 225
VA A
=
5.0 V
The programmed value will be 5.0V.
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
REMOTE UNIT ID PROGRAMMED = X
When communications is required with a BAS or OptiView Panel, individual unit IDs are necessary for communications with specific chillers on a single RS485 line. ID 0-7 is selectable.
Table 15 - PROGRAM KEY LIMITS AND DEFAULT
PROGRAM VALUE
MODE
Discharge Pressure Cutout
--
Suction Pressure Cutout
Water Cooling Glycol Cooling
Low Ambient Temp. Cutout
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp. Cutout
Anti-Recycle Timer Fan Control On Pressure (Not Applicable To A Ycrl) Fan Differential Off Pressure (Not Applicable To A Ycrl) Total Number Of Compressors Number Of Fans Per System Unit/System Trip Volts Remote Unit Id
Standard Ambient Low Ambient (N/A) Water Cooling
Glycol Cooling -- --
-- Single System Dual System
Current Feedback --
LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT DEFAULT
325 psig
575 psig
570 psig
22.4 barg
39.6 barg
39.3 barg
80.0 psig
120.0 psig
80.0 psig
5.52 barg
8.27 barg
5.52 barg
42.0 psig
70.0 psig
44.0 psig
2.9 barg
4.83 barg
3.03 barg
7
25.0°F
60.0°F
25.0°F
-3.9°C
15.6°C
-3.9°C
0°F
60.0°F
25.0°F
-17.8°C
15.6°C
-3.9°C
36°F
--
--
2.2°C
-1.0°F
36.0°F
36.0°F
-18.3°C
2.2°C
2.2°C
300 s
600 s
600 s
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2
3
3
4
6
6
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.5 V
4.5 V
2.5 V
0
7
0
JOHNSON CONTROLS
119
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
Quick Reference Programming Chart Setpoints Section
Cooling Setpoints Key (press key to adv.)
Local Leaving Water Temp Control
(Display Only)
Chilled Liquid Setpoint and Range
Schedule/ Advance Day Key
Mon. Sun. and
Holiday Schedule
Remote Setpoint and
Range (Display Only)
EMS - PWM Remote Temp Reset Setpoint
Figure 33 provides a quick reference of the setpoints list for the Setpoints Keys.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Program Mode (press enter to adv.)
Discharge Pressure
Cutout
Suction Pressure
Cutout
Low Ambient Temp. Cutout
Leaving Liquid Temperature
Cutout
Anti-Recycle Timer
Fan Control On-Pressure
(Not applicable to a YCRL)
Fan Differential Off-Pressure
(Not applicable to a YCRL)
Total Numbers of
Compressors
Number of Fans Per System
(Not applicable to a YCRL)
SYS / Unit Trip Volts Option
Remote Unit ID
Figure 33 - SETPOINTS QUICK REFERENCE LIST 120
LD07404c
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
UNIT KEYS
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
OPTIONS
CLOCK
Options Key There are many user programmable options under the OPTIONS key. The OPTIONS key is used to scroll through the list of options by repeatedly pressing the OPTIONS key. After the selected option has been displayed, the (UP) and (DOWN) arrow keys are then used to change that particular option. After the option is changed, the ENTER/ADV key must be pressed to enter the data into memory.
Many of the OPTIONS displayed are only programmable under the SERVICE MODE and not under the OPTIONS key. OPTIONS only programmable under the SERVICE MODE are noted in the details describing the option.
Figure 34 on page 126 shows the programmable options. Following are the displays in the order they appear:
Option 1 Language
D I S P L AY L ANGUAGE ENGL I SH
English, Spanish, French, German, and Italian can be programmed.
Option 2 System Switches (Two system units only, single system display is similar)
S Y S 1 SW I T CH ON S Y S 2 SW I T CH ON
This allows both systems to run
or
00070VIP
SYS 1 SYS 2
SW I T CH SW I T CH
O N OF F
This turns system 2 off
S Y S 1 SW I T CH O F F S Y S 2 SW I T CH ON
This turns system 1 off or
S Y S 1 SW I T CH O F F S Y S 2 SW I T CH O F F
7
This turns systems 1 and 2 off Turning a system OFF with its system switch allows a pumpdown to be performed prior to shutdown.
Option 3 Chilled Liquid Cooling Type
CH I L L ED L I QU I D WA T E R
The chilled liquid is water. The Cooling Setpoint can be programmed from 40 °F to 70 °F (4.4 °C to 21.1 °C)
or
CH I L L ED L I QU I D G L Y C O L
The chilled liquid is glycol. The Cooling Setpoint can be programmed from 10°F to 70°F (-12.2°C to 21.1°C).
JOHNSON CONTROLS
121
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
Option 4 Ambient Control Type
AMBIENT CONTROL S T A N D A R D
The low ambient cutout is adjustable from 25°F to 60°F (-3.9°C to 15.6°C).
or
AMB I E N T CON T RO L L OW AMB I E N T
The low ambient cutout is programmable down to 0°F (-17.8°C). This option does not apply to a YCRL chiller. Option 5 Local/Remote Control Type
L OC A L / R EMO T E MOD E L L OC A L
When programmed for LOCAL, an ISN or RCC control can be used to monitor only. The micro panel will operate on locally programmed values and ignore all commands from remote devices, or through the RS-485 inputs. The chiller will communicate and send data to the remote monitoring devices.
or
L OC A L / R EMO T E R EMO T E
MO D E
This mode should be selected when an ISN or RCC control is to be used to control the chiller. This mode will allow the ISN to control the following items: Remote Start/Stop, Cooling Setpoint, Load Limit, and History Buffer Request. If the unit receives no valid ISN transmission for 5 minutes, it will revert back to the locally programmed values.
Option 6 Unit Control Mode
CON T RO L MOD E RE TURN L I QU I D
Unit control is based on return chilled liquid temp. Return Chilled Liquid Control can only be selected on units that have 4 to 6 compressors (dual system units).
or
CON T RO L MOD E L EAV I NG L I QU I D
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Option 7 Display Units
D I SPLAY UN I TS I MPER I AL
This mode displays system operating values in Imperial units of °F or psig.
or
D I SPLAY UN I TS S I
This mode displays system operating values in Scientific International Units of °C or barg.
Option 8 Lead/Lag Type (two system units only)
L EAD / L AG CON T ROL MANUAL S YS 1 L EAD
SYS 1 selected as lead compressor. SYS 1 lead option MUST be chosen if Hot Gas Bypass is installed.
or
L EAD / L AG CON T ROL MANUAL S YS 2 L EAD
SYS 2 selected as lead compressor.
or
L EAD / L AG CON T ROL AU T OMA T I C
Lead/lag between systems may be selected to help equalize average run hours between systems on chillers with 2 refrigerant systems. Auto Lead/Lag allows automatic lead/lag of the two systems based on an average run hours of the compressors in each system. A new lead/lag assignment is made whenever all compressors shut down. The microprocessor will then assign the "lead" to the system with the shortest average run time.
Option 9 Condenser Fan Control Mode
F AN CONTROL D I S C H A RG E PR E S S U R E
Does not apply to a YCRL chiller.
122
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
F AN CONTROL AMB I E N T & D S CH PR E S S
Does not apply to a YCRL chiller.
Option 10 Manual Override Mode
MANU A L OV E RR I D E MOD E D I SABLED
This option allows overriding of the Daily Schedule that is programmed. MANUAL OVERRIDE MODE DISABLED indicates that override mode has no effect.
or
MANU A L OV E RR I D E MOD E ENAB L ED
Manual Override Mode is enabled. This is a service function and when enabled, will allow the unit to start when shut down on the Daily Schedule. It will automatically be disabled after 30 minutes.
Option 11 Current Feedback Options Installed
CURRENT FEEDBACK N O N E
This mode should be selected when the panel is not equipped with current sensing capability.
or
CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER UNIT
This mode should be selected when an optional 2ACE Module is installed to allow combined current monitoring of all systems by sensing current on the incoming line.
or
CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER SYSTEM
This mode should be selected when an optional 2ACE module is installed to allow individual current monitoring of each system. SYS 1 input is to J7 of the I/O. SYS 2 input is to J8 of the I/O.
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
Option 12 Power Fail Restart
P OWE R F A I L R E S T A R T AU T OMA T I C
Chiller auto restarts after a power failure.
P OWE R F A I L R E S T A R T MANU A L
After a power failure, the UNIT switch must be toggled before restart at the unit is allowed.
Normally MANUAL restart should not be selected.
Option 13 Soft Start Enable/Disable
SOFT START D I SABLED
SOFT START "DISABLED" MUST be selected on all chillers. This message may not be viewable on non-European chillers.
Option 14 Unit Type
7
U NIT TYPE LIQUID CHILLER
The UNIT TYPE message cannot be modified under the UNIT keys.
"LIQUID CHILLER" must be displayed, or damage to compressors or other components will occur if operated in the HEAT PUMP or CONDENSING UNIT modes.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
123
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
If Unit Type needs to be changed to make the unit a liquid chiller, remove power and then remove the jumper on J11-12. Reapply power to the micropanel and the microprocessor will store the change.
Option 15 Refrigerant Type
REFRIGERANT TYPE R 41 0 A
Refrigerant type R-410A must be selected under Service Mode. Refrigerant type is displayed under the OPTIONS key, but is only programmable in Service Mode.
Incorrect programming may cause damage to compressors.
Option 16 Expansion Valve Type
EXPANSION VALVE TYPE T H E R M O S T A T I C
Expansion valve type, thermostatic or electronic may be selected under Service Mode. Expansion valve type is displayed under the OPTIONS key, but is only programmable in Service Mode. YCRL 0064 0156 chillers will typically always be equipped with thermostatic expansion valves.
Incorrect programming may cause damage to compressors.
Also see Figure 34 on page 126, Unit Keys Programming Quick Reference List.
Option 17 Flash Card Update
F LASH CARD UPDAT E D I SABLED
A Flash Card is used to input the operating program into the chiller IPU. A Flash Card is used instead of an EPROM. Normally, a Flash Card update is not required and the message above will be displayed.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
If the operating software is to be updated, insert the Flash Card into the Flash Card input port. Turn off the UNIT switch and set the FLASH CARD UPDATE TO "ENABLED" using the and keys.
F LASH CARD UPDAT E ENAB L ED
Press the ENTER key and the following message will be displayed until the update has been completed. The keypad and display will not respond during the update. DO NOT reset or power down the chiller until the update is completed.
F LASH CARD UPDAT I NG P L E A S E WA I T . . .
After the update is completed, an automatic reboot will occur. If an error occurred, the following message will appear with the error code and no reboot will occur:
F LASH CARD UPDAT E
E RROR
XXXXX
If the update resulted in an error, the original program will still be active. When an error occurs, ensure that the correct Flash Card was utilized. Incorrect chiller software will cause an error. If this is not the case, the Flash Card is most likely defective or the IPU and I/O combo board is bad.
Option 18 Remote Temperature Reset
R EMO T E T EMP R E S E T
IN P U T
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Remote Temp Reset input selection is programmable according to the type of input utilized. The following options are available:
· DISABLED (default) · 0.0 VDC to 10.0 VDC · 2.0 VDC to 10.0 VDC · 0.0 mA to 20.0 mA · 4.0 mA to 20.0 mA
124
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
The options display message for Remote Temp Reset Input only appears if the Temp reset Option is enabled under Service Mode.
Option 19 Pump Control
Pump Control is utilized to operate the optional onboard pump kit or to control an external pump through dry contacts 23 and 24. To use this option, the following selection should be made in the Service Mode:
YORK HYDRO
K I T PUMP S
= 1
When YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS = 1, the controls will be closed to run the pumps whenever any one of the following conditions are true:
· Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Fault.
· Any compressor is running.
· Daily Schedule is ON and Remote Stop is closed. Even if one of the above conditions are true, the pump will not run if the chiller has been powered up for less than 30 seconds; or if the pump has run in the last 30 seconds to prevent pump overheating.
E X T ERNA L E V AP PUMP
EXTERNAL EVAP PUMP should be selected if an external pump is being controlled with the chiller pump contacts. The operation will be the same as YORK HDRO KIT PUMPS = 1.
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
The following option should not be selected.
YORK HYDRO
K I T PUMP S
= 2
Does not apply to a YCRL chiller.
Option 20 Pump Selection The displays for this PUMP SELECTION option should only appear if "YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS = 2" are selected under Option 19. This option should not be used on a YCRL chiller.
Clock The CLOCK display shows the current day, time, and date. Pressing the CLOCK key will show the current day, time, and date.
It is important that the date and time be correct, otherwise the Daily Schedule will not function as desired if programmed. In addition, for ease of troubleshooting via the history printouts, the day, time, and date should be correct.
To change the day, time, and date press the CLOCK key. The display will show something similar to the following:
T ODAY I S F R I 0 8 : 5 1 AM 2 5 J AN 0 2
7
The line under the F is the cursor. If the day is correct, press the ENTER/ADV key. The cursor will move under the 0 in 08 hours. If the day is incorrect, press the (UP) or (DOWN) arrow keys until the desired day is displayed and then press the ENTER/ADV key at which time the day will be accepted and the cursor will move under the first digit of the "2 digit hour". In a similar manner, the hour, minute, meridian, month, day, and year may be programmed, whenever the cursor is under the first letter/numeral of the item. Press the (UP) or (DOWN) arrow keys until the desired hour, minute, meridian; day, month, and year are displayed. Pressing the ENTER/ADV Key will save the valve and move the cursor on to the next programmable variable.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
125
SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS
Options Key (press Options Key
to adv.) Display Language
System Switches on/off
Chilled Liquid Type (water or glycol)
Ambient Control (standard or low)
Local/Remote Mode
Expansion Valve Type (Thermoplastic or Electric) (Programmed under Service
Mode, Viewable Only) Must be programmed
for Thermostatic
Flash Card Update
Remote Temp Reset
Pump Control
Pump Selection
Unit Control Mode (Return or Leaving)
Display Units (English or Metric)
System Lead/Lag Control (Manual or Automatic)
Fan Control Mode
· (Not applicable to a YCRL)
Manual Override Mode
Current Feedback Option
Power Failure Restart
Soft Start Option
Unit Type ("Chiller" MUST be Selected
Via No Jumper Installed (Viewable Only)
Refrigerant Type R-410A (Programmed under Service Mode)
Viewable Only)
Figure 34 - UNIT KEYS OPTIONS PROGRAMMING QUICK REFERENCE LIST 126
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
LD07405d
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 8 UNIT OPERATION
CAPACITY CONTROL
To initiate the start sequence of the chiller, all run permissive inputs must be satisfied (flow/remote start/stop switch), and no chiller or system faults exist.
The first phase of the start sequence is initiated by the Daily Schedule Start or any Remote Cycling Device. If the unit is shut down on the Daily Schedule, the chilled water pump microboard contacts (TB8 6-7) will close to start the pump when the Daily Schedule start time has been reached. Once flow has been established and the flow switch closes, capacity control functions are initiated, if the remote cycling contacts wired in series with the flow switch are closed.
It should be noted that the chilled water pump contacts (TB8 6-7) are not required to be used to cycle the chilled water pump. However, in all cases the flow switch must be closed to allow unit operation.
The control system will evaluate the need for cooling by comparing the actual leaving or return chilled liquid temperature to the desired setpoint, and regulate the leaving or return chilled liquid temperature to meet that desired setpoint.
SUCTION PRESSURE LIMIT CONTROLS
The anticipatory controls are intended to prevent the unit from ever actually reaching a low-pressure cutout. Loading is prevented, if the suction pressure drops below 1.15 x suction pressure cutout (15% below the cutout). Loading may reoccur after suction pressure rises above the unload point and a period of one minute elapses. This control is only operable if the optional suction pressure transducers are installed.
DISCHARGE PRESSURE LIMIT CONTROLS
The discharge pressure limit controls unload a system before it reaches a safety limit due to high load or dirty condenser coils. The microprocessor monitors discharge pressure and unloads a system, if fully loaded, by one compressor when discharge pressure exceeds the programmed cutout minus 10 psig (0.69 barg). Reloading will occur when the discharge pressure on the affected system drops to 85% of the unload pressure and 10 minutes have elapsed.
This control is only applicable if optional discharge pressure transducers are installed.
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL
The setpoint, when programmed for Leaving Chilled Liquid Control, is the temperature the unit will control to within plus or minus the (control) cooling range. The Setpoint High Limit is the Setpoint plus the cooling range. The Setpoint Low Limit is the Setpoint minus the cooling range. Figure 35 on page 127 should be utilized to aid in understanding the following description of Leaving Chilled Liquid Control.
If the leaving chilled liquid temperature is above the Setpoint High Limit, the lead compressor on the lead system will be energized along with the liquid line solenoid. Upon energizing any compressor, the 60 second anti-coincidence timer will be initiated to prevent multiple compressors from turning ON.
If after 60 seconds of run-time the leaving chilled liquid temperature is still above the Setpoint High Limit, the next compressor in sequence will be energized. Additional compressors will be energized at a rate of once every 60 seconds if the chilled liquid temperature remains above the Setpoint High Limit and the chilled liquid temperature is dropping less than 3 °F/min. The lag system will not be allowed to start a compressor until the lead system has run for 5 minutes.
If the chilled liquid temperature falls below the Setpoint High Limit but is greater than the Setpoint Low Limit, loading and unloading do not occur. This area of control is called the control range.
If the chilled liquid temperature drops to between Set- 8
point Low Limit and 0.5°F (0.28°C) below the Setpoint Low Limit, unloading (a compressor turns off) occurs at a rate of one every 30 seconds.
30 sec. unloading
Contol Range (no compressor staging)
60 sec. loading
LWT
44.0 ºF (6.7 ºC) Low Limit
46.0 ºF (7.8 ºC) Setpoint
48.0 ºF (8.9 ºC) High Limit
Leaving Water Temp. Control - Compressor Staging Setpoint = 46.0 ºF (7.8 ºC) Range = +/-2 ºF (1.1 ºC)
LD14404
Figure 35 - LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROL EXAMPLE
JOHNSON CONTROLS
127
SECTION 8 UNIT OPERATION
If the chilled liquid temperature falls to a value greater than 0.5°F (0.28°C) below the Setpoint Low Limit but not greater than 1.5°F (0.83°C) below the Setpoint Low Limit, unloading occurs at a rate of 20 seconds. If the chilled liquid temperature falls to a value greater than 1.5°F (0.83°C) below the Setpoint Low Limit, unloading occurs at a rate of 10 seconds. If the chilled liquid temperature falls below 1°F above the low chilled liquid temperature cutout, unloading occurs at a rate of 10 seconds if it is greater than 10 seconds.
In water cooling mode on R-410A chillers, the minimum low limit of the control range will be 40.0ºF. For leaving chilled liquid temperature setpoint and control range combinations that result in the low limit of the control range being below 40.0ºF, the low limit will be reset to 40.0ºF and the difference will be added to the high limit. This will result in a control range the same size as programmed but not allow the unit to run below 40.0ºF. This control will not affect glycol chillers.
Hot gas, if present, will be the final step of capacity. Hot gas is energized when only a single compressor is running and LWT is less than SP. Hot gas is turned off as temperature rises when LWT is more than SP plus CR/2. If temperature remains below the setpoint low limit on the lowest step of capacity, the microprocessor will close the liquid line solenoid, after turning off hot gas, and pump the system down before turning off the last compressor in a system.
The Leaving Chilled Liquid Setpoint is programmable from 40°F to 70°F (4.4°C to 21.1°C) in water chilling mode and from 10°F to 70°F (-12.2°C to 21.1°C) in glycol chilling mode. In both modes, the cooling range can be from plus or minus 1.5°F to plus or minus 2.5°F (plus or minus 0.83°C to 1.39°C) Leaving Chilled Liquid Control.
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL OVERRIDE TO REDUCE CYCLING
To avoid compressor cycling the microprocessor will adjust the setpoint upward temporarily. The last run time of the system will be saved. If the last run time was greater than 5 minutes, no action is to be taken. If the last run time for the lead system was less than 5 minutes, the microprocessor will increase the setpoint high limit according to the chart below, with a maximum value allowed of 50°F (See Figure 36 on page 128).
If adding the setpoint adjust value to the setpoint high limit causes the setpoint high limit to be greater than 50°F, the setpoint high limit will be set to 50°F, and the difference will be added to the setpoint low limit.
128
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Once a system runs for more than 5 minutes, the setpoint adjust will be set back to 0. This will occur while the system is still running.
SETPOINT ADJUST (DEG. F)
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
LAST RUN TIME OF LEAD SYSTEM (MINUTES)
LD11415
Figure 36 - SETPOINT ADJUST
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM LEAD/ LAG AND COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING
A Lead/Lag option may be selected to help equalize average run hours between systems with 2 refrigerant systems. This may be programmed under the OPTIONS key. Auto Lead/Lag allows automatic Lead/ Lag of the two systems based on average run hours of the compressors in each system. Manual Lead/Lag selects specifically the sequence which the microprocessor starts systems.
On a hot water start, once a system starts, it will turn on all compressors before the next system starts a compressor. The microprocessor will sequence compressors within each circuit to maximize individual compressor run time on individual compressors within a system to prevent short cycling.
Each compressor in a system will be assigned an arbitrary priority number 1, 2, or 1, 2, 3. The non-running compressor within a system with the lowest priority number will always be the next compressor to start. The running compressor with priority number 1 will always be the next to shut off. Whenever a compressor is shut off, the priority numbers of all compressors will be decreased by 1 with wrap-around. This control scheme ensures that the same compressor does not repeatedly cycle ON and OFF.
Once the second system starts a compressor on a 2 system chillers, the microprocessor will attempt to equally load each system as long as the system is not limiting or pumping down. Once this occurs, loading and unloading will alternate between systems, loading the lead system first or unloading the lag system first.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 8 UNIT OPERATION
Table 16 - SAMPLE COMPRESSOR STAGING FOR RETURN WATER CONTROL
# OF COMP ON RWT
* Unloading Only
COMPRESSOR STAGING FOR RETURN WATER CONTROL
4 COMPRESSORS
COOLING SETPOINT = 45°F (7.2°C) RANGE = 10°F (5.6°C)
0
*1+HG
1
2
3
45°F
46.25°F
47.5°F
50.0°F
52.5°F
(7.2°C)
(7.9°C)
(8.6°C)
(10.0°C)
(11.4°C)
4 55.0°F (12.8°C)
RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL
Return chilled liquid control is based on staging the compressors to match the cooling load. The chiller will be fully loaded when the return water temperature is equal to the Cooling Setpoint plus the Range. The chiller will be totally unloaded (all compressors off) when the return water temperature is equal to the Cooling Setpoint (See sample in Table 16 on page 129). At return water temperatures between the Cooling Setpoint and Cooling Setpoint plus Range, compressor loading and unloading will be determined by the formulas in Table 17 on page 129.
Return Chilled Liquid Control MUST only be used when constant chilled liquid flow is ensured.
The RANGE MUST always be programmed to equal the temperature drop across the evaporator when the chiller is "fully loaded". Otherwise, chilled liquid temperature will over or under shoot. Variable flow must never be used in return chilled liquid mode.
Normal loading will occur at intervals of 60 seconds according to the temperatures determined by the formulas. Unloading will occur at a rate of 30 seconds according to the temperatures determined in the formulas used to calculate the ON and OFF points for each step of capacity.
The Return Chilled Liquid Setpoint is programmable from 40°F to 70°F (4.4°C to 21.1°C) in water chilling mode and from 10°F to 70°F (-12.2°C to 21.1°C) in glycol chilling mode. In both modes, the cooling range can be from 4°F to 20°F (2.2°C to 11.1°C).
As an example of compressor staging (see Table 18
on page 130), a chiller with six compressors using a
Cooling Setpoint programmed for 45°F (7.20°C) and a
Range Setpoint of 10°F (5.56°C). Using the formulas in
Table 17 on page 129, the control range will be split
up into six (seven including hot gas) segments, with the
control range determining the separation between seg-
ments. Note also that the Cooling Setpoint is the point at
which all compressors are off, and Cooling Setpoint plus
Range is the point all compressors are on. Specifically,
if the return water temperature is 55°F (12.8°C), then
all compressors will be on, providing full capacity. At
nominal GPM, this would provide approximately 45°F (7.2°C) leaving water temperature out of the evaporator.
8
Table 17 - RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL FOR 4 COMPRESSORS (6 STEPS)
*STEP
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR ON POINT
COMPRESSOR OFF POINT
0
0
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
1
1 W/HGB
SP + CR/8 (Note 1)
SETPOINT
2
1 NO HGB
SP + CR/4
SP + CR/8
3
2
SP + 2*CR/4 (Note 2)
SP + CR/4
4
2
SP + 2*CR/4
SP + CR/4 (Note 3)
5
3
SP + 3*CR/4
SP + 2*CR/4
6
4
SP + CR
SP + 3*CR/4
Notes: 1. Step 1 is Hot Gas Bypass and is skipped when loading occurs. Hot Gas Bypass operation is inhibited during Pumpdown. 2. Step 3 is skipped when loading occurs. 3. Step 4 is skipped when unloading occurs. * STEP can be viewed using the OPER DATA key and scrolling to COOLING DEMAND.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
129
SECTION 8 UNIT OPERATION
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Table 18 - RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL FOR 4 COMPRESSORS (6 STEPS)
STEP 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
LEAD SYSTEM
COMP 1
COMP 2
-
OFF
OFF
-
ON + HG
OFF
-
ON
OFF
-
ON
OFF
-
ON
ON
-
ON
ON
-
ON
ON
-
LAG SYSTEM
COMP 1
COMP 2
-
OFF
OFF
-
OFF
OFF
-
See NOTE 1
OFF
OFF
-
ON
OFF
-
See NOTE 2
OFF
OFF
-
See NOTE 3
ON
OFF
-
ON
ON
-
NOTES: 1. Step is Hot Gas Bypass and is skipped when loading occurs. Hot Gas Bypass operation is inhibited during pumpdown. For Leaving Chilled
Liquid Control the Hot Gas Bypass solenoid is energized only when the lead compressor is running and the LWT < SP, the Hot Gas Bypass solenoid is turned off when the LWT > SP + CR/2. 2. Step 3 is skipped when loading occurs. 3. Step 4 is skipped when unloading occurs.
If the return water temperature drops to 53.4°F (11.9°C), one compressor would cycle off leaving five compressors running. The compressors would continue to cycle off approximately every 1.7°F (0.94°C), with the exception of Hot Gas Bypass. Notice that the Hot Gas Bypass would cycle on when the return water temperature dropped to 46.25°F (7.9°C). At this point one compressor would be running with hot gas.
Should the return water temperature rise from this point to 46.7°F (8.2°C), the Hot Gas Bypass would shut off, still leaving one compressor running. As the load increased, the compressors would stage on every 1.7°F (0.94°C).
Also note that Table 17 on page 129 not only provides the formulas for the loading (On Point) and unloading (Off Point) of the system, the "STEP" is also shown in the tables. The "STEP" is the increment in the sequence of the capacity control scheme that can be viewed under the OPER DATA key. See Display/ Print Keys on Page 105 for specific information on the OPER DATA key.
RETURN CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM LEAD/ LAG AND COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING
A lead/Lag option may be selected to help equalize average run hours between systems with 2 refrigerant systems. This may be programmed under the OPTIONS key. Auto Lead/Lag of the 2 systems based on average run hours of the compressors in each system. Manual Lead/Lag selects specifically the sequence which the microprocessor starts the systems.
The microprocessor will sequence compressors load and unload systems according to Table 18 on page 130. The microprocessor will lead/lag compressors within each circuit to maximize individual compressor run time for the purpose of lubrication. It will also prevent the same compressor from starting two times in a row. The microprocessor will not attempt to equalize run time on individual compressors within a system.
Each compressor in a system will be assigned an arbitrary number 1, or 2. The non-running compressor within a system with the lowest priority number will always be the next compressor to start. The running compressor with priority number 1 will always be the next compressor to shut off. Whenever a compressor is shut off, the priority numbers of all compressors in each system will be decreased by 1 with the wrap around. This control scheme ensures that the same compressor does not repeatedly cycle ON and OFF.
ANTI-RECYCLE TIMER
The programmable anti-recycle timer ensures that systems do not cycle. This timer is programmable under the PROGRAM key between 300 seconds and 600 seconds. Whenever possible, to reduce cycling and motor heating, the anti-recycle timer should be adjusted to 600 seconds. The programmable anti-recycle timer starts the timer when the first compressor in a system starts. The timer begins to count down. If all of the compressors in a circuit cycle off, a compressor within the circuit will not be permitted to start until the anti-recycle timer has timed out. If the lead system has run for less than 5 minutes, 3 times in a row, the anti-recycle timer will be extended to 10 minutes.
130
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
ANTI-COINCIDENCE TIMER
This timer is not present on single-system units. Two timing controls are present in software to ensure that compressors within a circuit or between systems, do not start simultaneously. The anti-coincidence timer ensures that there is at least a one minute delay between system starts on 2-circuit systems. This timer is NOT programmable. The load timers further ensure that there is a minimum time between compressor starts within a system.
EVAPORATOR PUMP CONTROL AND YORK HYDRO KIT PUMP CONTROL
The evaporator pump dry contacts (CTB2 terminals 23 and 24) are energized when any of the following conditions are true:
1. Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Fault.
2. Any compressor is running.
3. Daily Schedule is ON, Unit Switch is ON and Remote Stop is closed.
The pump will not run if the micro panel has been powered up for less than 30 seconds or if the pump has run in the last 30 seconds to prevent pump motor overheating.
Whenever the option "YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS = 1" is selected under the OPTIONS key, the pump control will be as described above. DO NOT SELECT the option "YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS = 2" under the OPTIONS key.
EVAPORATOR HEATER CONTROL
The evaporator heater is controlled by ambient air temperature. When the ambient temperature drops below 40°F (4.4°C) the heater is turned ON. When the temperature rises above 45°F (7.2°C) the heater is turned off. An under voltage condition will keep the heater off until full voltage is restored to the system.
PUMPDOWN CONTROL
Each system has a pump-down feature upon shut-off. Manual pumpdown from the keypad is not possible. On a non-Safety, non-Unit Switch shutdown, all compressors but one in the system will be shut off. The LLSV will also be turned off. The final compressor will be allowed to run until the suction pressure falls below the cutout, or for 180 seconds, whichever comes first.
SECTION 8 UNIT OPERATION
LOAD LIMITING
Load Limiting is a feature that prevents the unit from loading beyond the desired value. Four-compressor units can be load limited to 50%. This would allow only 1 compressor per system to run. Six-compressor units can be load limited to 33% or 66%. The 66% limit would allow up to 2 compressors per system to run, and the 33% limit would allow only 1 compressor per system to run. No other values of limiting are available.
There are two ways to load limit the unit. The first is through remote communication via an ISN. Load limit stages are sent through YORK Talk on pages 9 and 10 of feature 54. Page 9 is stage 1 load limit and page 10 is stage 2 load limit.
A second method of load limiting the unit is through closing dry contacts connected to the Load Limit (CTB1 Terminals 13 and 21). Stage 1 load limiting involves closing the Load Limit input (13 and 21) with a dry contact. Load limiting is either 66% or 50%, depending on the number of compressors on the unit. A second step of load limiting on six-compressor chillers is available by closing the CTB1 terminals 13 and 20 with dry contact. This allows only a single compressor to run on each system, unloading the chiller to 33%. Table 19 on page 131 shows the load limiting permitted for the various number of compressors. Only Stage 1 is available utilizing a dry contact.
Table 19 - COMPRESSOR OPERATION LOAD LIMITING
COMPRESSORS IN UNIT
STAGE 1
STAGE 2
8
4
50%
-
6
66%
33%
Simultaneous operation of Remote Load Limiting and EMS-PWM Temperature Reset (described on following pages) cannot occur.
COMPRESSOR RUN STATUS
Compressor run status is indicated by closure of contacts at CTB2 terminals 25 to 26 for system 1 and CTB2 terminals 27 to 28 for system 2.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
131
SECTION 8 UNIT OPERATION
ALARM STATUS
System or unit shutdown is indicated by normally-open alarm contacts opening whenever the unit shuts down on a unit fault, locks out on a system fault, or experiences a loss of power to the chiller electronics. System 1 alarm contacts are located at CTB2 terminals 29 to 30. System 2 alarm contacts are located at CTB2 terminals 31 to 32. The alarm contacts will close when conditions allow the unit to operate, or the fault is reset during a loss of power, the contacts will remain open until power is reapplied and no fault conditions exist.
EMS-PWM REMOTE TEMPERATURE RESET
EMS PWM Remote Temperature Reset is a value that resets the Chilled Liquid Setpoint based on a PWM input (timed contact closure) to the microboard. This PWM input would typically be supplied by an Energy Management System.
A contact closure on the PWM Temp Reset input at CTB1 terminals 13-20, will reset the Chilled Liquid Setpoint based on the length of time the contacts remain closed. The maximum temperature reset is achieved at a contact closure of 11 seconds. This is the longest contact closure time allowed. One second is the shortest time allowed and causes the Chilled Liquid Setpoint to revert back to the local programmed value. The reset value is always added to the Chilled Liquid Setpoint, meaning that this function never lowers the Chilled Liquid Setpoint below the locally programmed value, it can only reset to a higher value. The microboard must be refreshed between 30 seconds and 30 minutes. Any contact closure occurring sooner than 30 seconds will be ignored. If more than 30 minutes elapse before the next contact closure, the setpoint will revert back to the locally programmed value. The new Chilled Liquid Setpoint is calculated by the following equation:
Setpoint = Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint + °reset °Reset = (Contact Closure - 1) x (*Max. Reset Value)
10
Example: Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint = 45°F (7.22°C). *Max Reset Value = 10°F (5.56°C) Contact Closure Time = 6 seconds.
(English) (6 sec. - 1) (10°F/10) = 5°F Reset
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
So, the new Chilled Liquid Setpoint = 45°F + 5°F= 50°F. This can be viewed by pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS key twice. The new value will be displayed as "REM SETP = 50.0°F."
(Metric) (6 sec - 1) x (5.56°C/10) = 2.78°C Reset Cooling Setpoint = 7.22°C + 2.78°C = 10.0°C
So, the new reset Cooling Setpoint = 7.22 °C + 2.78°C = 10°C. This can be viewed by pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS key twice. The new value will be displayed as "REM SETP = 10.0°C."
* Max Reset Value is the "Max EMS-PWM Remote Temp. Reset" setpoint value described in the "Programming" section under "Cooling Setpoints". Programmable values are from 2°F to 40°F (1.11°C to 22.22°C).
BAS/EMS TEMPERATURE RESET USING A VOLTAGE OR CURRENT SIGNAL
The Remote Reset Option allows the Control Center of the unit to reset the Chilled Liquid Setpoint using a 0 VDC to 10 VDC input, or a 4 mA to 20 mA input connected to CTB1 terminals A- and A+. Whenever a reset is called for, the change may be noted by pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS key twice. The new value will be displayed as "REM SETP = XXX °F." This reset value is always added to the locally programmed Chilled Liquid Setpoint, meaning this function never lowers the Chilled Liquid Setpoint below the locally programmed value.
If a 0 to 10VDC signal is supplied, it is applied to terminals A+ and A, and jumper JP1 on the I/O board must be inserted between pins 2 and 3. To calculate the reset Chilled Liquid Setpoint for values between 0VDC and 10VDC use the following formula:
Setpoint = Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint + °Reset
°Reset = (DC voltage signal) x (*Max Reset Value) 10
Example: Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint = 45°F (7.22°C) *Max Reset Value = 20°F (11.11°C) Input Signal = 6 VDC
132
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
(English) °Reset = 6VDC x 20 °F = 12 °F Reset
10 New Setpoint = 45 °F + 12 °F = 57 °F
(Metric) °Reset = 6VDC x 11. 11 °C = 6.67 °C Reset
10 New Setpoint = 7.22 °C + 6.67 °C = 13.89 °C
* Max Reset Value is the "Max EMSPWM Remote Temp. Reset" setpoint value described in the "Programming"
section under Cooling Setpoints. Programmable values are from 2 °F to 40 °F (1.11 °C to
11.11 °C).
If a 4 mA to 20mA signal is supplied, it is applied to terminals A+ and A and jumper JP1 on the I/O board must be installed between pin 1 and 2. To calculate the Chilled Liquid Setpoint for values between 4 mA and 2 0mA use the following formula:
Setpoint = Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint + °Reset
°Reset = (mA signal 4) x (*Max Reset Value) 16
Example: Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint = 45°F (7.22°C) *Max Reset Value = 10°F (5.56°C) Input Signal = 12 mA
(English) °Reset = 8 mA x 10°F = 5°F Reset
16 Setpoint = 45°F + 5°F = 50°F
(Metric) °Reset = 8 mA x 5.56°C = 2.78°C Reset
16 Setpoint = 7.22°C + 2.78°C = 10.0°C
SECTION 8 UNIT OPERATION
VDC PRESSURE SETTING GUIDELINES
When a Johnson Controls remote condenser type VDC is used with a YCRL chiller, the VDC must be ordered and installed with the "Head Pressure Control High Pressure" option which provides Johnson Controls model P470 pressure controllers factory mounted in the VDC control panel. Operating manuals for the P470 controllers is included in the VDC control panel to allow field setup of the fan staging.
The following pressure set points are recommended for general use. If excessive fan cycling is noted the final stage of cycling should be adjusted (deadband increased). The dead band proposed in these guidelines is set to 125 psi, which is the standard setting for Johnson Controls air cooled R-410 units (YLAA, YCAL).
· 2 stage units (2 fan single wide, 4 fan double wide VDC):
· Stage 1, ON when any compressor is ON
· Stage 2, ON at 385 psig, OFF at 260 psig
· 3 stage units (3 fan single wide, 6 fan double wide VDC): · Stage 1, ON when any compressor is ON · Stage 2, ON at 385 psig, OFF at 260 psig · Stage 3, ON at 405 psig, OFF at 280 psig
· 4 stage units (4 fan single wide, 8 fan double wide VDC):
· Stage 1, ON when any compressor is ON
8
· Stage 2, ON at 385 psig, OFF at 235 psig
· Stage 3, ON at 405 psig, OFF at 280 psig
· Stage 4, ON at 425 psig, OFF at 300 psig
JOHNSON CONTROLS
133
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
134
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 9 SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CLEARING HISTORY BUFFERS
The history buffers may be cleared by pressing the HISTORY key and then repeatedly pressing the (UP) arrow key until you scroll past the last history buffer choice. The following message will be displayed:
I I N I T I AL I ZE
H I S TORY
ENTER = YES
Pressing the ENTER/ADV key at this display will cause the history buffers to be cleared. Pressing any other key will cancel the operation.
DO NOT CLEAR BUFFERS. Important information may be lost. Contact factory service.
SERVICE MODE
Service Mode is a mode that allows the user to enable or disable all of the outputs (except compressors) on the unit, change chiller configuration setup parameters and view all the inputs to the microboard.
To enter Service Mode, turn the Unit Switch OFF and press the following keys in the sequence shown; PROGRAM, UP ARROW, UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW, DOWN ARROW, ENTER. Service Mode will time out after 30 minutes and return to normal control mode, if the panel is accidentally left in this mode. Otherwise, turning the Unit Switch ON will take the panel out of Service Mode.
SERVICE MODE OUTPUTS
After pressing the key sequence as described, the control will enter Service Mode permitting the outputs (except compressors), operating hours, refrigerant type, expansion valve type, and start/hour counters to be viewed/modified. The ENTER/ADV key is used to advance through the outputs. Using the and (UP/ DOWN ) arrow keys will turn the respective digital output ON/OFF or modify the value.
Following is the order of outputs that will appear as the ENTER/ADV key is pressed:
SYS 1 COMP 1 STATUS TB7-2 IS:
SYS 1 LLSV STATUS TB7-3 IS:
SYS 1 COMP 2 STATUS TB7-4 IS:
SYS 1 COMP 3 STATUS TB7-5 IS:
SYS 1 HGBP STATUS TB7-7 IS:
SYS 2 COMP 1 STATUS TB10-2 IS:
SYS 2 LLSV STATUS TB10-3 IS:
SYS 2 COMP 2 STATUS TB10-4 IS:
SYS 2 COMP 3 STATUS TB10-5 IS:
SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 1 TB7-8 IS:
SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 2 TB7-9 IS:
SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 3 TB7-10 IS: N/A SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 1 TB10-8 IS:
SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 2 TB10-9 IS:
SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 3 TB10-10 IS:
EVAP HEATER STATUS TB8-2 IS:
SYS 1 ALARM STATUS TB8-3 IS:
SYS 2 ALARM STATUS TB9-2 IS:
EVAP PUMP STATUS TB8-6,7 IS:
SYS 2 HGBV STATUS TB10-7 IS:
SPARE DO TB8-4 IS:
SPARE DO TB8-5 IS:
SPARE DO TB8-8, 9 IS:
SPARE DO TB9-4 IS:
SYS 1 EEV OUTPUT TB5-1, 2 = XXX%
SYS 2 EEV OUTPUT TB6-1, 2 = XXX%
SYS 1 COND FAN SPEED J15-1,5 = XXX%
SYS 2 COND FAN SPEED J15-2,6 = XXX%
SPARE AO J15-3,7 = XXX%
SPARE AO J15-4,8 = XXX%
DATA LOGGING MODE 1 = ON, 0 = OFF
DATA LOGGING TIMER X SECS
SOFT START (disabled)
REFRIGERANT TYPE (R-410A only) EXPANSION VALVE TYPE (Thermostatic Only)
9
REMOTE TEMP RESET OPTION =
REMOTE INPUT SERVICE TIME =
"NORTH AMERICAN FEATURE SET ENABLED"
HYDRO PUMP SELECTION
EVAP PUMP TOTAL RUN HOURS
SYS 1 HOURS
SYS 2 HOURS
SYS 1 STARTS
SYS 2 STARTS
Each display will also show the output connection on
the microboard for the respective output status shown.
For example:
JOHNSON CONTROLS
135
SECTION 9 SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
SYS 1 LLSV STATUS T B 10 - 3 I S O F F
This display indicates that the system 1 liquid line solenoid valve is OFF, and the output connection from the microboard is coming from terminal block 10 pin 3.
Pressing the (UP) arrow key will energize the liquid line solenoid valve and OFF will change to ON in the display as the LLSV is energized. Energizing and de-energizing outputs may be useful during troubleshooting.
SERVICE MODE CHILLER CONFIGURATION
After the Outputs are displayed, the next group of displays relate to chiller configuration and start/hour counters. Data logging, soft start, refrigerant type, pump control selection and expansion valve type all must be programmed to match actual chiller configuration.
Soft start (disabled), Refrigerant Type (R-410A), and Expansion Valve Type (Thermostatic), and North American Feature (Enabled) MUST be properly programmed or damage to compressors and other system components may result.
The following is a list of chiller configuration selections, in order of appearance:
DATA LOGGING MODE = : DO NOT MODIFY DATA LOGGING TIMER = : DO NOT MODIFY
SOFT START REFRIGERANT TYPE EXPANSION VALVE TYPE REMOTE TEMP RESET OPTION REMOTE INPUT SERVICE TIME
FEATURE SET PUMP CONTROL SELECTION
HOT GAS TYPE UNIT TYPE
SYS 1 HOURS SYS 2 HOURS SYS 1 STARTS SYS 2 STARTS
The last displays shown on the above list are for the accumulated run and start timers for each system. All values can also be changed using the (UP) and (DOWN) arrow keys, but under normal circumstances would not be required or advised. After the last start display, the microprocessor will display the first programmable value under the PROGRAM key.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SERVICE MODE ANALOG AND DIGITAL INPUTS
After entering Service Mode (PROGRAM ), all digital and analog inputs to the microboard can be viewed by pressing the OPER DATA key. After pressing the OPER DATA key, the (UP) arrow and (DOWN) arrow keys are used to scroll through the analog and digital inputs.
The following is the order of analog and digital inputs that will appear when sequenced with the (Down) arrow key:
(analog inputs) SYS 1 SUCT PRESSURE
UNIT TYPE SYS 1 *DISCH PRESSURE SYS 1** SUCTION TEMP. SYS 2** SUCTION TEMP.
AMBIENT AIR TEMP. LEAVING LIQUID TEMP. RETURN LIQUID TEMP. SYS 2 SUCTION PRESSURE
SYS 2 SPARE SYS 2 *DISCH PRESSURE
SYS 1 MTR VOLTS SYS 2 MTR VOLTS
(digital inputs) PWM TEMP RESET INPUT
LOAD LIMIT INPUT FLOW SW / REM START
SPARE SINGLE SYSTEM SELECT SYS 1 MP / HPCO INPUT SYS 2 MP / HPCO INPUT
* The discharge pressure transducer is optional on some models. ** The suction temp. sensor is on EEV units only.
The analog inputs will display the input connection, the temperature or pressure, and corresponding input voltage such as:
136
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SYS 1 SUCT PR J 7 - 1 0 2 . 1 VDC = 8 1 PS I G
This example indicates that the system 1 suction pressure input is connected to plug 7 pin 10 (J7-10) on the I/O board. It indicates that the voltage is 2.1 VDC which corresponds to 81 psig (5.6 bar) suction pressure.
The digital inputs will display the input connection and ON/OFF status such as:
F L OW SW / R E M S T A R T J 13 - 9 I S O N
This indicates that the flow switch/remote start input is connected to plug 13 - pin 9 (J13-9) on the I/O Board, and is ON (ON equals +30 VDC unregulated input, OFF equals 0 VDC input on digital inputs).
CONTROL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Tables 20 through 26 are a quick reference list providing the connection points and a description of the inputs and outputs respectively. All input and output connections pertain to the connections at the microboard.
Table 20 - I/O DIGITAL INPUTS
J13-2 J13-3 J13-4 J13-5 J13-6 J13-7
J13-8
J13-10
Unit ON/OFF Switch Load Limit Stage 2 on 3, 5 and 6 Comp. Units Load Limit Stage 1 Flow Switch and Remote Start/Stop Spare Single System Select (Jumper = Single Sys, No Jumper = Two Sys) CR1 (Sys 1 Motor Protector/High Pressure Cutout) CR2 (Sys 2 Motor Protector/High Pressure Cutout)
SECTION 9 SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 21 - I/O DIGITAL OUTPUTS
TB7-2 SYS 1 Compressor 1 TB7-3 SYS 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve TB7-4 SYS 1 Compressor 2 TB7-5 SYS 1 Compressor 3 TB7-7 SYS 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve TB10-2 SYS 2 Compressor 1 TB10-3 SYS 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve TB10-4 SYS 2 Compressor 2 TB10-5 SYS 2 Compressor 3 TB7-8 SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 1 (N/A) TB7-9 SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 2 (N/A) TB7-10 SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 3 (N/A) TB10-8 SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 1 (N/A) TB10-9 SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 2 (N/A) TB10-10 SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 3 (N/A) TB8-2 Evaporator Heater TB8-3 SYS 1 Alarm TB9-2 SYS 2 Alarm TB8-6 & 7 Evaporator Pump Starter TB10-7 SYS 2 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
Table 22 - I/O ANALOG INPUTS
SYS 1 Suction Transducer J7-10 -or-
SYS 1 Low Pressure Switch
Unit Type: Chiller = NO Jumper J11-12 to +24 VDC J11-12 YCUL Condensing Unit = Jumper J11-12 to +24 VDC
(Do NOT Use)
J7-11 SYS 1 Discharge Pressure Transducer (Optional)
J6-9 Ambient Air Temp. Sensor
J6-7 Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp. Sensor
J6-8 Return Chilled Liquid Temp. Sensor
SYS 2 Suction Pressure Transducer J9-10 -or-
SYS 2 Low Pressure Switch
J9-11
SYS 2 Discharge Pressure Transducer (Optional)
9
J7-12 Unit/SYS 1 Voltage
J9-12 SYS 2 Voltage
J11-11 Remote Temperature Reset
Table 23 - I/O ANALOG OUTPUTS N/A Not Applicable
JOHNSON CONTROLS
137
SECTION 9 SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
MICROBOARD LAYOUT
TB6
TB5
J15
TB1
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
I/O BOARD
TB7 TB8 TB9 TB10
J14
J13
Figure 37 - MICROBOARD LAYOUT 138
J12
J11
J3
J5
IPU BOARD
J6 J7 J8 J9 J10
JP1
LD12721
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
CHECKING INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Digital Inputs See the unit wiring diagram. All digital inputs are connected to J13-1 of the I/O board. The term "digital" refers to two states either ON or OFF. As an example, when the flow switch is closed, 30 VDC will be applied to J13, pin 9 (J13-9) of the I/O board. If the flow switch is open, 0VDC will then be present at J13-9.
Typically, voltages of between 24 VDC and 36 VDC could be measured for the DC voltage on the digital inputs. This voltage is in reference to ground. The unit case should be sufficient as a reference point when measuring digital input voltages.
Analog Inputs Temperature See the unit wiring diagram. Temperature inputs are connected to the microboard on plug J6. These analog inputs represent varying DC signals corresponding to varying temperatures. All voltages are in reference to the unit case (ground). Following are the connections for the temperature sensing inputs:
Liquid and Refrigerant Sensor Test Points Entering Chilled Liquid Sensor
J6-5 = +5 VDC regulated supply to sensor. J6-8 = VDC input signal to the I/O board. See Table
24 on page 139 for voltage readings that correspond to specific liquid temperatures. J6-2 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC) Return
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Sensor
J6-4 = +5 VDC regulated supply to sensor. J6-7 = VDC input signal to the microboard. See Table
24 on page 139 for voltage readings that correspond to specific liquid temperatures. J6-1 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC) Return
SECTION 9 SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 24 - ENTERING/LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR, TEMPERATURE/VOLTAGE CORRELATION
VOLTAGE
TEMP °F
(Signal Input
TEMP °C
to Return)
10
1.33
-12
12
1.39
-11
14
1.46
-10
16
1.51
-9
18
1.58
-8
20
1.65
-7
22
1.71
-6
24
1.78
-4
26
1.85
-3
28
1.91
-2
30
1.98
-1
32
2.05
0
34
2.12
1
36
2.19
2
38
2.26
3
40
2.33
4
42
2.40
6
44
2.47
7
46
2.53
8
48
2.60
9
50
2.65
10
52
2.73
11
54
2.80
12
56
2.86
13
58
2.92
14
60
2.98
16
62 64
3.05 3.11
17 18
9
66
3.17
19
68
3.23
20
70
3.29
21
72
3.34
22
74
3.39
23
76
3.45
24
78
3.5
26
80
3.54
27
JOHNSON CONTROLS
139
SECTION 9 SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Analog Inputs Pressure
See the unit wiring diagram. Pressure inputs are connected to the microboard on plugs J7 and J9. These analog inputs represent varying DC signals corresponding to varying pressures. All voltages are in reference to the unit case (ground).
System 1 discharge and suction pressures will be connected to J7 of the microboard. System 2 discharge and suction pressure transducers will be connected to J9 of the microboard.
The discharge transducers are optional on all units. If the discharge transducers are not installed, no connections are made to the microboard and the discharge pressure readout on the display would be zero.
The suction pressure transducers are standard on all YCRL's. The suction pressure transducers have a range of 0 to 400 psig. The output will be linear from 0.5 VDC to 4.5 VDC over the 400 psig (27.5 barg) range.
Table 25 - PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
0400 PSIG SUCTION PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
PRESSURE VOLTAGE
PSIG
VDC
0
0.5
50
1.0
100
1.5
150
2.0
200
2.5
250
3.0
300
3.5
350
4.0
400
4.5
0650 PSIG DISCHARGE PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
PRESSURE VOLTAGE
PSIG
VDC
0
0.5
81.25
1.0
162.5
1.5
243.75
2.0
325
2.5
406.25
3.0
487.75
3.5
568.75
4.0
650
4.5
Red Wire = 5V, Black wire = 0V, White/Green Wire = signal
TEST POINTS:
Suction Pressure: System 1: ..................................Microboard J7-10 to J7-9 System 2: ..................................Microboard J9-10 to J9-9
Discharge Pressure: System 1: ..................................Microboard J7-11 to J7-7 System 2: ..................................Microboard J9-11 to J9-7
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
The discharge transducers have a range from 0 psig to 650 psig. The output will be linear from 0.5 VDC to 4.5 VDC over the 650 psig (41.25 barg) range. Following is the formula that can be used to verify the voltage output of the transducer. All voltage reading are in reference to ground (unit case).
V = (Pressure in psig x .01) + .5 or
V = (Pressure in barg x .145) + .5
where V = DC voltage output Pressure = pressure sensed by transducer
The I/O board connections for the Discharge Transducers:
System 1 Discharge Transducer
J7-6 = +5 VDC regulated supply to transducer. J7-11 = VDC input signal to the microboard. See the
formula above for voltage readings that correspond to specific discharge pressures. J7-7 = +5 VDC return J7-2 = drain (shield connection = 0 VDC)
System 2 Discharge Transducer
J9-6 = +5 VDC regulated supply to transducer. J9-11 = VDC input signal to the microboard. See the
formula above for voltage readings that correspond to specific discharge pressures. J9-7 = +5 VDC return J9-2 = drain (shield connection = 0 VDC)
140
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
The suction transducers have a range from 0 to 400 psig (27.5 barg). The output will be linear from 0.5 VDC to 4.5 VDC over the 400 psig (27.5 barg) range. Following is a formula that can be used to verify the voltage output of the transducer. All voltage reading are in reference to ground (unit case).
V = (Pressure in psig x .02) + .5 or
V = (Pressure in barg x .29) + .5
where V = DC voltage input to microprocessor Pressure = pressure sensed by transducer
Following are the I/O board connections for the Suction Transducer:
System 1 Suction Transducer
J7-5 = +5 VDC regulated supply to transducer. J7-10 = VDC input signal to the microboard.
See the formula above for voltage readings that correspond to specific suction pressures. J7-9 = +5 VDC return J7-1 = drain (shield connection = 0 VDC)
System 2 Suction Transducer
J9-5 = +5 VDC regulated supply to transducer. J9-10 = VDC input signal to the microboard.
See the formula above for voltage readings wthat correspond to specific suction pressures. J7-9 = +5 VDC return J7-11 = drain (shield connection = 0 VDC)
SECTION 9 SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Digital Outputs
See the unit wiring diagram and Figure 38 on page 141. The digital outputs are located on TB7, TB8, and TB9 and TB-10 of the microboard. All outputs are 120 VAC with the exception of TB8-6 to TB8-7 which are the contacts that can be used for a remote evaporator pump start signal. The voltage applied to either of these terminals would be determined by field wiring.
Each output is controlled by the microprocessor by switching 120 VAC to the respective output connection energizing contactors, evaporator heater, and solenoids according to the operating sequence (see Figure 38 on page 141).
120 VAC is supplied to the I/O board via connections at TB7-1, TB7-6, TB10-1, TB10-6, TB8-1 and TB9-1. Figure 38 on page 141 illustrates the relay contact architecture on the microboard.
TB7-2
SYS 1 COMP 1
TB7-3 LLSV 1
TB7
TB7-4
SYS 1 COMP 2
TB7-5
SYS 1 COMP 3
TB7-7
TB7-8 TB7
TB7-9
TB7-10
TB10 TB10
TB10-2
SYS 2 COMPR 1 (4)
TB10-3 LLSV 2
TB10-4
SYS 2 COMPR 2 (5)
TB10-5
SYS 2 COMPR 3 (6)
TB10-7
SYS 2 HGSV
9
TB10-8
TB10-9
TB10-10
TB8-6 EVAP
TB8
TB8-7 PUMP
TB8-2
HEAT EXCH HEATER
LD12722A
Figure 38 - I/O BOARD RELAY CONTACT ARCHITECTURE
JOHNSON CONTROLS
141
SECTION 9 SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
OPTIONAL PRINTER INSTALLATION
The micro panel is capable of supplying a printout of chiller conditions or fault shutdown information at any given time. This allows operator and service personnel to obtain data and system status with the touch of the keypad. In addition to manual print selection, the micro panel will provide an automatic printout whenever a fault occurs. Detailed explanation of the print function is given under PRINT key located in SECTION 7 UNIT CONTROLS.
Johnson Controls recommends the field tested WEIGHTRONIX model 1220 printer (or former IMP 24). This is a compact low cost printer that is ideal for service work and data logging.
The WEIGH-TRONIX printer can be obtained by contacting WEIGH-TRONIX for purchase information at:
WEIGH-TRONIX 2320 Airport Blvd. Santa Rosa, CA 95402 Phone: 1-800-982-6622 or 1-707-527-5555
(International Orders Only)
The part number for the printer that is packaged specifically for Johnson Controls is P/N 950915576. The cable to connect the printer can either be locally assembled from the parts listed, or ordered directly from WEIGH-TRONIX under part number 287-040018.
Parts The following parts are required:
1. WEIGH-TRONIX model 1220 printer.
2. Desk top calculator paper, 2.25 in. (5.7 cm) wide.
3. Twisted Pair Shielded Cable (minimum 3 conductor), #18 AWG stranded, 300 V minimum insulation, 25 ft (7.62 m) maximum length.
4. One 25 pin Cannon connector and shell.
Connector: Cannon P/N DB-25P or equivalent.
Shell: Cannon P/N DB-C2-J9.
Assembly and Wiring All components should be assembled and wired as shown in Figure 39 on page 142. Strip the outside insulation back several inches and individual wires about 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) to connect the cable at the microboard. Do not connect the shield at the printer-end of the cable.
Obtaining a Printout A printout is obtained by pressing the PRINT key on the keypad and then pressing either the OPER DATA key or HISTORY key.
Chiller Microboard TB3
TB3-3 TXD
TB3-2 CTS
TB3-5 GND
Printer
2 RD 5 CTS 7 SG
Shield (connect shield to Pin 5 of the connector.
Do not connect shield at printer end.
Figure 39 - PRINTER TO MICROBOARD ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 142
LD12723
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 9 SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 26 - TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM
NO DISPLAY ON PANEL. UNIT WILL NOT OPERATE.
CAUSE 1. No 115 VAC to 24 VAC
Transformer.
2. No 24VAC to Microboard.
3. Control Transformer defective, no 24VAC output.
4. Short in wire to temp. sensors or pressure transducers.
5. Defective IPU II and I/O Board or the Display Board.
SOLUTION 1a. Check wiring and fuse 1FU.
1b. C heck wiring emergency stop contacts 5 to L of CTB2 Terminal Block.
1c. Replace Control Transformer. 2. C heck wiring Control Transformer to
Microboard. 3. Replace Control Transformer.
4. U nplug connections at IPU II and I/O Board to isolate.
5. R eplace IPU II and I/O Board or the Display Board.
Contact Johnson Controls Service before replacing circuit boards.
1. No chilled liquid flow.
1. Check chilled liquid flow.
FLOW SWITCH/REM STOP NO RUN PERMISSIVE
2. Flow switch improperly installed.
3. Defective flow switch. 4. Remote cycling device open.
2. C heck that the flow switch is installed according to manufacturer's instructions.
3. Replace flow switch.
4. C heck cycling devices connected to terminals 13 and 14 of the CTB1 Terminal Block.
1. Improper suction pressure cutouts adjustments.
1. Adjust per recommended settings.
2. Low refrigerant charge.
2. Repair leak if necessary and add refrigerant.
3. Fouled filter dryer.
3. Change dryer/core.
4. TXV defective.
4. Replace TXV.
LOW SUCTION PRESSURE FAULT
5. Reduced flow of chilled liquid through the cooler.
5. C heck GPM (See "Limitations" liquid through the cooler in Installation section). Check operation of pump, clean pump strainer,
purge chilled liquid system of air.
9
6. Defective suction pressure
6. R eplace transducer/low pressure switch or
transducer/low pressure switch
faulty switch or wiring. See "Service" section
or wiring.
for pressure/voltage formula.
7. LLSV defective
7. Replace LLSV
1. Remote condenser fans not operating.
1. Check Remote Condenser.
HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE 2. Too much refrigerant.
FAULT
3. Air in refrigerant system.
2. Remove refrigerant. 3. Evacuate and recharge system.
4. Defective discharge pressure transducer.
4. R eplace discharge pressure transducer. See Service section for pressure/voltage formula.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
143
SECTION 9 SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
TABLE 26 - TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT'D)
PROBLEM
CAUSE
SOLUTION
1. Improperly adjusted leaving chilled liquid temp. cutout (glycol only).
1. R eprogram the leaving chilled liquid temp. cutout.
2. Micro panel setpoint/range
2. Readjust setpoint/range.
values improperly programmed.
LOW LIQUID TEMP FAULT
3. Chilled liquid flow too low.
3. Increase chilled liquid flow. See Limitations in Installation section.
4. Defective LWT or RWT sensor (ensure that the sensor is properly installed in the bottom of the well with a generous amount of heat) conductive compound).
4. C ompare sensor against a known good Temperature sensing device. See Service section for temp./ voltage table.
MP / HPCO FAULT
1. Compressor internal motor protector (MP) open.
2. External overload tripped.
1. V erify refrigerant charge is not low. Verify superheat setting of 10°F to 15°F (5.6°C to 8.3°C). Verify correct compressor rotation. Verify compressor is not overloaded.
2. Determine cause and reset.
3. HPCO switch open.
3. See "High Press. Disch." Fault.
4. Defective HPCO switch.
4. Replace HPCO switch.
5. Defective CR relay.
5. Replace relay.
1. Demand not great enough.
1. N o problem. Consult "Installation" Manual to aid in understanding compressor operation and capacity control.
2. Defective water temperature COMPRESSOR(S) WON'T START sensor.
2. C ompare the display with a thermometer. Should be within plus or minus 2 degrees. See Service section for RWT/LWT temp./ voltage table.
3. Contactor/Overload failure.
3. Replace defective part.
4. Compressor failure.
4. Diagnose cause of failure and replace.
1. Fouled evaporator surface. Low suction pressure will be observed.
1. C ontact the local Johnson Controls service representative.
LACK OF COOLING EFFECT
2. Improper flow through the evaporator.
2. R educe flow to within chiller design specs. See Limitations in Installation section.
3. Low refrigerant charge. Low suction pressure will be observed.
3. C heck subcooling and add charge as needed.
144
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
It is the responsibility of the equipment owner to provide maintenance on the system.
IMPORTANT
If system failure occurs due to improper maintenance during the warranty period, Johnson Controls will not be liable for costs incurred to return the system to satisfactory operation. The following is intended only as a guide and covers only the chiller unit components. It does not cover other related system components which may or may not be furnished by Johnson Controls. System components should be maintained according to the individual manufacture's recommendations as their operation will affect the operation of the chiller.
COMPRESSORS
Oil Level Check
The oil level can only be tested when the compressor is running in stabilized conditions, to ensure that there is no liquid refrigerant in the lower shell of the compressor. When the compressor is running at stabilized conditions, the oil level must be visible in the oil sight glass.
At shutdown, the oil level should be between the bottom and middle of the oil sight glass. Use only YORK "V" oil when adding oil.
OPERATING PARAMETERS
Regular checks of the system should be preformed to ensure that operating temperatures and pressures are within limitations, and that the operating controls are set within proper limits. See the Operation, Start-Up, and Installation sections of this manual.
ON-BOARD BATTERY BACK-UP
U5 is the Real Time Clock chip located on the 03102630 IPU II board that maintains the date/time and stores customer programmed setpoints. The Real Time Clock is a 128K bram, P/N 031-02565-000. The IPU II board must have JP1 installed when the 128K bram is installed.
Do not confuse JP1 on the IPU II (03102630) board with JP1 on the I/O (03102550) board.
OVERALL UNIT INSPECTION
In addition to the checks listed on this page, periodic overall inspections of the unit should be accomplished to ensure proper equipment operation. Items such as loose hardware, component operation, refrigerant leaks, unusual noises, etc. should be investigated and corrected immediately.
Oil Analysis
The oil used in these compressors is pale yellow in color (POE oil). If the oil color darkens or exhibits a change in color, this may be an indication of contaminants in the refrigerant system. If this occurs, an oil sample should be taken and analyzed. If contaminants are present, the system must be cleaned to prevent compressor failure.
Never use the scroll compressor to pump
the refrigerant system down into a vacuum.
10
Doing so will cause internal arcing of the
compressor motor which will result in fail-
ure of compressor.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
145
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
BACNET, MODBUS AND YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS
Data can be read and in some cases modified using a serial communication BACnet, Modbus or YorkTalk 2 network connection. This information allows communications of chiller operating parameters and external control changes to setpoint, load limiting, and start/ stop commands.
BACnet and YorkTalk 2 RS485 networks are wired to the + and - terminals of TB1 for port 1 communications. Modbus network connection has the option of RS232 or RS485 connection for port 2 communications. Modbus network is wired to either TB2 or TB3 as follows:
· RS-485: connect to TB2 - Network (-1) to TB2 (-1); Network (+1) to TB2 (+1)
· RS-232: connect to TB3 - Network (RX) to TB3 (TXD); Network (TX) to TB3 (RXD); Network (GND) to TB3 (GND)
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
See Figure 40 on page 147 "Micro Panel Connections" for TB1, TB2 and TB3 locations.
In most cases, communication parameters will need to be modified. Values Required For Bas Communication on Page 148 "Values Required for BAS Communication" lists setup parameters for the available protocols. Modification is accomplished by pressing the PROGRAM, DOWN ARROW, DOWN ARROW, DOWN ARROW, DOWN ARROW, and ENTER keys in sequence. The list below shows the displays for the values that may be modified:
DE MODIFIER ADDRESS XXXXX
DE MODIFIER OFFSET XX
P1 PROTOCOL XXXXXX
P1 MANUAL MAC ADDRESS
XXX
P1 BAUD RATE
XXXXX
P1 PARITY
XXXXX
P1 STOP BITS X
P2 PROTOCOL XXXXXXXXXX
P2 MANUAL MAC ADDRESS
XXX
P2 BAUD RATE
XXXXX
P2 PARITY
XXXXX
P2 STOP BITS X
P2 HW SELECT BIT XXXXX
REAL TIME ERROR ## RESET 1 = YES, 0 = NO 0 Note: See Table 29 for error descriptions
146
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
035-02550-xxx I/O Board
Figure 40 - MICRO PANEL CONNECTIONS
LD14318
The table below shows the minimum, maximum, and default values.
Table 27 - MINIMUM, MAXIMUM AND DEFAULT VALUES
DESCRIPTION
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
DEFAULT
De Modifier Address
-1
41943
-1
De Modifier Offset
-1
99
-1
P1 Baud Rate
1200
76800
4800
1200, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800, Auto Selectable
P2 Baud Rate
1200
57600
1200
1200, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 Selectable
P1, P2 Manual Mac Address
-1
127
-1
P1, P2 Parity
None
Ignore
None
None, Even, Odd, Ignore Selectable
P1 Protocol
BACNET
API
BACNET
BACNET, API Selectable
P2 Protocol
Terminal
Modbus Client
API
Terminal, Modbus Io, Modbus Server, API, Modbus Client Selectable
P1, P2 Stop Bits
1
2
1
10
Reset Real Time Error
No
Yes
No
JOHNSON CONTROLS
147
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
The table below shows set-up requirements for each communication protocol.
Table 28 - VALUES REQUIRED FOR BAS COMMUNICATION
SETTING DESCRIPTION
BACnet MS/TP
Protocol Modbus RTU5
DE Modifier Address
0 to 41943(3)
1
DE Modifier Offset
0 to 99(4)
0
P1 Protocol
BACNET
N/A
P1 Manual Mac Address
0-127(1)
N/A
P1 Baud Rate
9600 To 76800 or Auto Selectable(1)
N/A
P1 Parity
NONE
N/A
P1 Stop Bits
1
N/A
P2 Protocol
N/A
MODBUS SVR
P2 Manual Mac Address
N/A
0-127(1)
P2 Baud Rate
N/A
19,200(2)
P2 Parity
N/A
NONE(2)
P2 Stop Bits
N/A
1
P2 Hw Select Bit
N/A
RS-485 or RS-232(1)
Reset Real Time Error
N/A
N/A
P1 HW Select Bit
N/A
N/A
Chiller ID
N/A
N/A
1as Required By Network
2or Other As Required By Network
3number Is Multiplied By 100, Set As Required By Network
4number Is Added To De Modifier Address, Set As Required By Network
5unit Operating Software Version C.Mmc.13.03 Or Later Required For Modbus Protocol
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
YorkTalk 2 -1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0
Reboot Required (Cycle Power) After Settings are Changed.
The table shows the real time error numbers that may be encountered during communication setup and a description of each.
Table 29 - REAL TIME ERROR NUMBERS
ERROR NUMBER (##) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DESCRIPTION
All Ok Datum Type Ok Test Failed English Text Too Long Floating Point Exception Get Packet Failed Get Type Failed Invalid Unit Conversion Invalid Hardware Selection Real Time Fault Spanish Text Too Long Thread Exited Thread Failed Thread Stalled IO Board Reset Bram Invalid Bacnet Setup Failed
148
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
BACnet and Modbus Communications Chiller data that can be read and modified using specific BACnet or Modbus Register Addresses; and the data associated with the addresses, is outlined in the following description:
Analog Write Points This data can be read and modified using a BACnet or Modbus network connection. The Modbus Register Address for these points is 1025 + AV #.
Binary Write Points This data can be read and modified using a BACnet or Modbus network connection. The Modbus Register Address for these points is 1537 + BV #.
Analog Read Only Points This data can be read using a BACnet or Modbus network connection and can NOT be modified using this connection. The Modbus Register Address for these points is 513 + AI #.
Binary Monitor Only Points This data can be read using a BACnet or Modbus network connection and can NOT be modified using this connection. The Modbus Register Address for these points is 1281 + BI #.
See Table 30 on page 150 for complete list of BACnet and Modbus registers.
The latest data map information is listed on the Johnson Controls Equipment Integration website.
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
Communications Data Map Notes 1. IPU II based units are configured for Native BACnet MS/TP and Modbus RTU communications. MicroGateway or E-Link not required for these two communication protocols. 2. BACnet Object Types: · 0 = Analog In · 1 = Analog Out · 2 = Analog Value · 3 = Binary In · 4 = Binary Output · 5 = Binary Value · 8 = Device · 15 = Alarm Notification (0 through 127 are reserved ASHRAE Objects) 3. WC= Inches of water column CFM = Cubic Feet per Minute FPM = Feet per Minute PSI = Lbs per square inch Pa = Pascals kPa = Kilopascals PPM = Part per Million kJ/kg = Kilojoules per Kilogram 4. Water Cooled Scroll units use the same firmware as Air Cooled Scroll units, ignoring Fan Control.
10
JOHNSON CONTROLS
149
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
Table 30 - BACNET AND MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP
150
SCROLL CHILLER/HEATPUMP/CONDENSING UNIT
Item
Version
1 C.MMC.13.11, C.MMC.14.11, C.MMC.16.12
2 C.MMC.13.11, C.MMC.14.11, C.MMC.16.13
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
York P/N 031-02755-001, -003, -004 031-02755-001, -003, -004
Item Ref Num
BACnet Name
BACnet Object Instance
Modbus Address
Modbus Data Type Supported
Modbus Scaling (See
Note 5)
N2 Metasys
ANALOG WRITE POINTS
1 REM_SETP
AV1
2 SP_REM_SP_S1
AV2
3 LOAD_LIMIT
AV3
4 REM_CR
AV4
5 SP_REM_SP_S2
AV5
6 REM_SP_HEAT
AV6
7 HP_MODE
AV7
BINARY WRITE POINTS
8 START_STOP
BV1
9 SS_SYS1
BV2
10 SS_SYS2
BV3
ANALOG READ ONLY POINTS
11 LCHLT
AI1
12 RCHLT
AI2
13 DAT
AI3
14 S1_SUCT_TEMP
AI4
15 OAT
AI5
16 S1_SUCT_SH
AI6
17 S1_RUN_TIME
AI7
18 S1_SUCT_PR
AI8
19 S1_DSCH_PR
AI9
20 S1_CIR_TEMP
AI10
21 S1_DEF_TEMP
AI11
22 S1_EEV_OUT
AI12
23 S1_AR_TIMER
AI13
24 AC_TIMER
AI14
25 S2_SUCT_TEMP
AI15
26 S2_RUN_TIME
AI16
27 S2_SUCT_PR
AI17
28 S2_DSCH_PR
AI18
29 S2_CIR_TEMP
AI19
30 S2_DEF_TEMP
AI20
31 S2_SUCT_SH
AI21
32 S2_AR_TIMER
AI22
33 S2_EEV_OUT
AI23
34 NUM_COMPS
AI24
1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031
1032
1538 1539 1540
514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537
03,06,16 03,06,16 03,06,16 03,06,16 03,06,16 03,06,16
03,06,16
01,03,05,06,15 01,03,05,06,15 01,03,05,06,15
03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04
Div 10 Div 10 Div 10 Div 10 Div 10 Div 10
Div 10
N/A N/A N/A
x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x1
ADF 1 ADF 2 ADF 3 ADF 4 ADF 5 ADF 6
ADF 7
BD 1 BD 2 BD 3
ADF 8 ADF 9 ADF 10 ADF 11 ADF 12 ADF 13 ADF 14 ADF 15 ADF 16 ADF 17 ADF 18 ADF 19 ADF 20 ADF 21 ADF 22 ADF 23 ADF 24 ADF 25 ADF 26 ADF 27 ADF 28 ADF 29 ADF 30 ADF 31
Modbus RTU, BACnet MS/TP, N2 Data Map
New Update Unit Control Mode
Comments
08/16/2017 Board: 031-02550
Engineering Units
Imperial
SI
Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Point List Description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
°F PSI None °F PSI °F
None
0/1 0/1 0/1
°F °F °F °F °F °F (diff) None PSI PSI °F °F % None None °F None PSI PSI °F °F °F (diff) None % None
°C BAR None °C BAR °C
None
Remote Setpoint [99=Auto]
S
Sys 1 Remote Setpoint (SP Unit)
O
Load Limit Stage [0,1,2]
S
Remote Cooling Range (DAT Unit)
O
Sys 2 Remote Setpoint (SP Unit)
O
Remote Heating Setpoint (HP or YCWL HP)
O
Remote Heatpump Mode [0=Pnl, 1=Cool, 2=Heat] (HP or YCWL HP)
O
0/1 Remote Start/Stop Command [0=Stop, 1=Run]
S
0/1 Sys 1 Remote Start/Stop (SP Unit)
N
0/1 Sys 2 Remote Start/Stop (SP Unit)
N
°C
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp
S
°C
Entering Chilled Liquid Temp
S
°C
Discharge Air Temp (DAT Unit)
O
°C
Sys 1 Suction Temp (EEV, Cond Units, R-410a)
O
°C
Ambient Air Temp
S
°C (diff) Sys 1 Suction Superheat (EEV)
S
None Sys 1 Run Time in seconds
S
BAR Sys 1 Suction Pressure
S
BAR Sys 1 Discharge Pressure
S
°C
Sys 1 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temp (R-407c)
O
°C
Sys 1 Defrost Temperature (HP)
O
%
Sys 1 EEV Output % (EEV)
O
None Sys 1 Anti-Recycle Timer in seconds
S
None Anti-Coincident Timer in seconds
S
°C
Sys 2 Suction Temperature (EEV)
S
None Sys 2 Run Time in seconds
S
BAR Sys 2 Suction Pressure
S
BAR Sys 2 Discharge Pressure
S
°C
Sys 2 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temp (R-407c)
O
°C
Sys 2 Defrost Temperature (HP)
O
°C (diff) Sys 2 Suction Superheat
S
None Sys 2 Anti-Recycle Timer
S
%
Sys 2 EEV Output % (EEV)
O
None Number of Compressors
S
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
JOHNSON CONTROLS
SCROLL Native Comms
Property of Johnson Controls, Inc. Subject to change without notice.
1 of 4
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
TABLE 30 - BACNET AND MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP (CONT'D)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
Item Ref Num 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
BACnet Name
S1_OP_CODE S1_FLT_CODE S2_OP_CODE S2_FLT_CODE S1_DBG_CODE S1_FAN_STAGE S2_DBG_CODE S2_FAN_STAGE
BACnet Object Instance
AI25 AI26 AI27 AI28 AI29 AI30 AI31 AI32
43 CONTROL_MODE
AI33
44 AR_TIME
AI34
45 LCHLT_CUT
AI35
46 LOW_AMB_CUT
AI36
47 SUCT_P_CO_HT
AI37
48 L_SUCT_P_CO
AI38
49 H_DSCH_P_CO
AI39
50 COOL_SETP
AI40
51 SP_SETP_S1
AI41
52 CONTROL_RG
AI42
53 SP_CTL_RG_S1
AI43
54 SP_SETP_S2
AI44
55 HEAT_SETP
AI45
56 SP_CTL_RG_S2
AI46
57 HEAT_RANGE
AI47
58 S1_DSCH_TEMP
AI48
59 S1_DSCH_SH
AI49
60 S2_DSCH_TEMP
AI50
61 S2_DSCH_SH
AI51
62 LEAVING_HOT
AI52
63 RETURN_HOT
AI53
64 R_COOL_SETP
AI54
65 R_SP_SETP_S1
AI55
66 R_SP_SETP_S2
AI56
67 R_HEAT_SETP
AI57
BINARY READ ONLY POINTS
68 S1_ALARM
BI1
69 S2_ALARM
BI2
70 EVAP_HTR
BI3
71 EVAP_PUMP
BI4
72 S1_C1_RUN
BI5
73 S2_C1_RUN
BI6
74 S1_LLSV
BI7
75 S1_MODE_SV
BI8
76 S1_HGBV
BI9
77 S1_BHS
BI10
78 S1_C2_RUN 79 S2_C2_RUN 80 S2_LLSV 81 S2_MODE_SV 82 LEAD_SYS 83 S1_C3_RUN
BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16
Modbus Address
538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545
546
547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570
1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290
1291
1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297
Modbus Data Type Supported
03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04
03,04
03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04 03,04
Modbus Scaling (See
Note 5)
x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1
x1
x1 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10 x10
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
01,02,03
N/A
N2 Metasys
ADF 32 ADF 33 ADF 34 ADF 35 ADF 36 ADF 37 ADF 38 ADF 39
ADF 40
ADF 41 ADF 42 ADF 43 ADF 44 ADF 45 ADF 46 ADF 47 ADF 48 ADF 49 ADF 50 ADF 51 ADF 52 ADF 53 ADF 54 ADF 55 ADF 56 ADF 57 ADF 58 ADF 59 ADF 60 ADF 61 ADF 62 ADF 63 ADF 64
BD4 BD5 BD6 BD7 BD8 BD9 BD10 BD11 BD12
BD13
BD14 BD15 BD16 BD17 BD18 BD19
08/16/2017
Engineering Units
Imperial None None None None None None None None
SI None None None None None None None None
None
None
None °F °F PSI PSI PSI °F PSI °F PSI PSI °F PSI °F °F
°F (diff) °F
°F (diff) °F °F °F PSI PSI °F
None °C °C BAR BAR BAR °C BAR °C BAR BAR °C BAR °C °C
°C (diff) °C
°C (diff) °C °C °C BAR BAR °C
Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Point List Description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Sys 1 Operational Code
S
Sys 1 Fault Code
S
Sys 2 Operational Code
S
Sys 2 Fault Code
S
Sys 1 Debug Code
N
Sys 1 Condenser Fan Stage
S
Sys 2 Debug Code
N
Sys 2 Condenser Fan Stage
S
Unit Control Mode [1=LW, 2=RW, 3=DA, 4=SP, 5=HC, 6=HP]
S
Anti-Recycle Time Programmed
S
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Cutout
S
Low Ambient Temperature Cutout
S
Low Suction Pressure Cutout Heating (HP)
O
Low Suction Pressure Cutout Cooling
S
High Discharge Pressure Cutout
S
Cooling Setpoint
S
Sys 1 Cooling Setpoint (SP Unit)
O
Cooling Range
S
Sys 1 Cooling Range (SP Unit)
O
Sys 2 Cooling Setpoint (SP Unit)
O
Heating Setpoint (HP)
O
Sys 2 Cooling Range (SP Unit)
O
Heating Range (HP)
O
Sys 1 Discharge Temperature (EEV)
O
Sys 1 Discharge Superheat (EEV)
O
Sys 2 Discharge Temperature (EEV)
O
Sys 2 Discharge Superheat (EEV)
O
Leaving Liquid Hot Temp (R-410a)
O
Return Liquid Hot Temp (R-410a)
O
Remote Setpoint
S
Remote Setpoint 1 (SP Unit)
O
Remote Setpoint 2 (SP Unit)
O
Remote Heating Setpoint (HP)
O
0/1
0/1 Sys 1 Alarm [0=No Alarm, 1=Alarm]
S
0/1
0/1 Sys 2 Alarm [0=No Alarm, 1=Alarm]
S
0/1
0/1 Evaporator Heater Status
S
0/1
0/1 Evaporator Pump
S
0/1
0/1 Sys 1 Comp 1 Run
S
0/1
0/1 Sys 2 Comp 1 Run
S
0/1
0/1 Sys 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
S
0/1
0/1 Sys 1 Mode Solenoid Valve (HP)
O
0/1
0/1 Sys 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
O
0/1
0/1
Bivalent Heat Source (YLAE HP) Tray Heater (YLPA)
O
0/1
0/1 Sys 1 Comp 2 Run
S
0/1
0/1 Sys 2 Comp 2 Run
S
0/1
0/1 Sys 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
S
0/1
0/1 Sys 2 Mode Solenoid Valve (HP)
O
0/1
0/1 Lead System [0=Sys 1, 1=Sys 2]
S
0/1
0/1 Sys 1 Comp 3 Run
S
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
SCROLL Native Comms
Property of Johnson Controls, Inc. Subject to change without notice.
2 of 4
10
151
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
TABLE 30 - BACNET AND MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP (CONT'D)
152
Item Ref Num 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
BACnet Name
S2_C3_RUN CH_LIQ_TYPE AMB_MODE CNTL_MODE DATA_UNIT AUTO_LL S2_HGBV
BACnet Object Instance
BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23
Modbus Address
1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304
Modbus Data Type Supported
01,02,03 01,02,03 01,02,03 01,02,03 01,02,03 01,02,03 01,02,03
Modbus Scaling (See
Note 5)
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
N2 Metasys
BD20 BD21 BD22 BD23 BD24 BD25 BD26
08/16/2017
Engineering Units
Imperial
SI
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Point List Description Sys 2 Comp 3 Run Chilled Liquid Type [0=Water, 1=Glycol] Ambient Control Mode [0=Std Amb, 1=Low Amb] Local Remote Control Mode [0=Manual, 1=Auto] Display Units [0=Imperial, 1=SI] Lead Lag Control Mode [0=Manual, 1=Auto] Sys 2 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 S S S S S S O
NOTES 1 Units have Native BACnet MS/TP, Modbus RTU, and N2 communications. No external Gateway is required for these interfaces unless the customer is using Connected Services. 2 BACnet Object Types: 0 = Analog In, 1 = Analog Out, 2 = Analog Value, 3 = Binary In, 4 = Binary Out, 8 = Device, 15 = Alarm Notification (0-127 are reserved ASHRAE Objects) 3 WC = Inches of water Column, CFM = Cubic Feet per Minute, FPM = Feet Per Minute, PSI = Pounds per Square Inch, Pa = Pascals, kPa = kiloPascals, PPM = Parts Per Million, kJ/kg = kiloJoules per kilogram 4 Values that are not applicable due to unit configuration and options will be sent as zero (0). 5 Modbus values are all of type signed. Scaling values in x10 (Bold) indicate scaling in metric is x100. Scaling and signing may not be modified in the field. 6 7 8 9 10
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
JOHNSON CONTROLS
SCROLL Native Comms
Property of Johnson Controls, Inc. Subject to change without notice.
3 of 4
10
153
JOHNSON CONTROLS
Code Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Operational Code No Abnormal Condition Unit Switch OFF System Switch OFF Lockout Unit Fault System Fault Remote Shutdown Daily Schedule Shutdown No Run Permissive No Cool Load Anti-Coincidence Timer Active Anti-Recycle Timer Active Manual Override Suction Limiting Discharge Limiting
Load Limiting Compressor(s) Running Heatpump Load Limiting
SCROLL Native Comms 16 AUG 2017
Code Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
No Fault Code 115 VAC Under Voltage Low Ambient Temperature
Fault/Inhibit Code
Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature High Discharge Pressure
Low Suction Pressure
MP/HPCO Fault Low Evaporator Temperature
Unit Motor Current Low Superheat Sensor Fault Discharge Inhibit MP/HPCO Inhibit Pump Trip Pump Fail Make Flow High Ambient Temperature Anti-Vacuum Low Pressure Cutout
Property of Johnson Controls, Inc. Subject to change without notice.
08/16/2017 4 of 4
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
TABLE 30 - BACNET AND MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP (CONT'D)
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
Yorktalk 2 Communications
Received Data (Control Data)
The unit receives eight data values from the MicroGateway or E-Link. The first four are analog values and the last four are digital values. These eight data values are used as control parameters when in REMOTE mode. When the unit is in LOCAL mode, these eight values are ignored. If the unit receives no valid YorkTalk 2 transmission for 5 minutes it will revert back to all local control values. Table 31 on page 155 "Yorktalk 2 Communications Data Map" lists the control parameters. These values are found under feature 54 in the MicroGateway or E-Link.
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Transmitted Data
After receiving a valid transmission from the MicroGateway or E-Link, the unit will transmit either operational data or history buffer data depending on the "History Buffer Request" on ENG PAGE 10. Data must be transmitted for every page under feature 54. If there is no value to be sent to a particular page, a zero will be sent. Table 31 on page 155 "Yorktalk 2 Communications Data Map" shows the data values and page listings for this unit.
The latest point map information is listed on the Johnson Controls Equipment Integration website.
154
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
Table 31 - YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP
JOHNSON CONTROLS
SCROLL CHILLER/HEATPUMP/CONDENSING UNIT
York Talk 2 (eLink)
Item
Version
York P/N
Baud
1 C.MMC.13.05, C.MMC.14.05, C.MMC.16.07 031-02755-001, -003, -0408400 New
2 C.MMC.13.11, C.MMC.14.11, C.MMC.16.11 031-02755-001, -003, -0408400 Update: add SCC, section 2
3 C.MMC.16.12
031-02755-004
4800 Update: -004 release
4 C.MMC.13.14, C.MMC.14.14, C.MMC.16.14 031-02755-001, -003, -0408400 Update
5
6
7
8
9
10
Comments
04/17/2018
Board: 031-02550
SECTION 1
Eng Page Ref
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
P08 P09 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14
P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21
P22 P23 P24 P25 P26
BACnet Object Typ/Ins
BACnet Object Name
AV1 YT2_ S01_ P03
AV2 YT2_ S01_ P04
YT2_ S01_ P05 AV3
YT2_ S01_ P06 AV4
BV1
BV2 BV3 BV4 AV5 AV6 AV7
AV8
AV9 AV10 AV11 AV12 AV13 AV14
AV15
AV16 AV17 AV18 AV19 AV20
YT2_ S01_ P07
YT2_ S01_ P08 YT2_ S01_ P09 YT2_ S01_ P10 YT2_ S01_ P11 YT2_ S01_ P12 YT2_ S01_ P13 YT2_ S01_ P14
YT2_ S01_ P15 YT2_ S01_ P16 YT2_ S01_ P17 YT2_ S01_ P18 YT2_ S01_ P19 YT2_ S01_ P20 YT2_ S01_ P21
YT2_ S01_ P22 YT2_ S01_ P23 YT2_ S01_ P24 YT2_ S01_ P25 YT2_ S01_ P26
LON Profile Name
nviYTS01p003
nviYTS01p004
nviYTS01p005
nviYTS01p006
nviYTS01p007 nviYTS01p008 nviYTS01p009 nviYTS01p010 nvoYTS01p011 nvoYTS01p012 nvoYTS01p013 nvoYTS01p014 nvoYTS01p015 nvoYTS01p016 nvoYTS01p017 nvoYTS01p018 nvoYTS01p019 nvoYTS01p020 nvoYTS01p021 nvoYTS01p022 nvoYTS01p023 nvoYTS01p024 nvoYTS01p025 nvoYTS01p026
LON SNVT Type
N2 Metasys
SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51)
ADF 1 ADF 2
SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 3
SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 4
SNVT_switch (95)
SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51)
BD 1 BD 2 BD 3 BD 4 ADF 5 ADF 6 ADF 7
SNVT_count_f (51)
SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51)
ADF 8 ADF 9 ADF 10 ADF 11 ADF 12 ADF 13 ADF 14
SNVT_count_f (51)
SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51)
ADF 15 ADF 16 ADF 17 ADF 18 ADF 19 ADF 20
Modbus Address Scale
0001
x10
0002
x1
0003
x10
0004
x1
0005
N/A
0006
N/A
0007
0008
N/A
0009
x10
0010
x10
0011
x10
0012
x10
0013
x10
0014
x10
0015
x10
0016
x1
0017
x10
0018
x10
0019
x10
0020
x10
0021
x10
0022
x1
0023
x1
0024
x10
Engineering Units
Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Imperial SI
Point List Description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
°F
°C Remote Setpoint [99=Auto]
PSI BAR Sys 1 Remote Setpoint (SP Unit)
SSSS
None
None
Load Limit Stage [0, 1, 2] Sys 1 Load Limit Stage [0, 1, 2]
SSSS
°F
°C Remote Heating Setpoint (HP or YCWL HP)
°F
°C Remote Cooling Range (DAT Unit)
OOOO
PSI BAR Sys 2 Remote Setpoint (SP Unit)
Remote Heatpump Mode [0=Pnl, 1=Cool, 2=Heat]
None None (HP or YCWL HP)
OOOO
Sys 2 Load Limit Stage [0, 1, 2]
0/1
0/1
Start/Stop Command Sys 1 Start/Stop Command
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Sys 2 Start/Stop Command
OOOO
NNNN
0/1
0/1 History Buffer Request
SSSS
°F
°C Leaving Chiller Liquid Temp
SSSS
°F
°C Entering Chilled Liquid Temp
SSSS
°F
°C Leaving Liquid Temp Hot (YCWL)
OOOO
°F
°C
Discharge Air Temp (Cond Unit) Entering Liquid Temp Hot (YCWL)
OOOO
°F
°C Sys 1 Suction Temperature (EEV)
OOOO
°F
°C Ambient Air Temperature
SSSS
°F (diff) °C (diff) Sys 1 Suction Superheat (EEV)
OOOO
None None Sys 1 Run Time in seconds
SSSS
PSI BAR Sys 1 Suction Pressure
SSSS
PSI BAR Sys 1 Discharge Pressure
SSSS
°F
°C
Sys 1 Suction Temperature (Cond Unit) Sys 1 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temp (R-407c)
OOOO
°F
°C Sys 1 Defrost Temperature (HP)
OOOO
%
% Sys 1 EEV Output % (EEV)
OOOO
None None Sys 1 Anti-Recycle Timer in seconds
SSSS
None None Anti-Coincident Timer in seconds
SSSS
°F
°C Sys 2 Suction Temperature (EEV)
OOOO
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
10
155
Scroll BAS(ISN)
Johnson Controls, Inc. Subject to change without notice.
1 of 6
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
TABLE 31 - YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP (CONT'D)
156
04/17/2018
Eng Page Ref P27 P28 P29
P30
P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 P38 P39 P40 P41
P42
P43
P44 P45
P46
P47 P48 P49 P50 P51 P52 P53 P54 P55 P56 P57 P58 P59 P60 P61 P62 P63 P64
P65
P66 P67 P68 P69
BACnet Object Typ/Ins
BACnet Object Name
AV21 YT2_ S01_ P27
AV22 YT2_ S01_ P28
AV23 YT2_ S01_ P29
AV24 YT2_ S01_ P30
AV25 AV26 AV27 AV28 AV29 BV5 BV6 BV7 BV8 BV9 BV10
BV11
YT2_ S01_ P31 YT2_ S01_ P32 YT2_ S01_ P33 YT2_ S01_ P34 YT2_ S01_ P35 YT2_ S01_ P36 YT2_ S01_ P37 YT2_ S01_ P38 YT2_ S01_ P39 YT2_ S01_ P40 YT2_ S01_ P41 YT2_ S01_ P42
YT2_ S01_ P43 BV12
BV13 BV14
BV15
BV16 BV17 BV18 BV19 BV20 BV21 BV22 BV23 BV24 MV1 MV2 MV3 MV4 MV5 MV6 MV7 MV8 MV9
MV10
AV30 AV31 AV32 AV33
YT2_ S01_ P44 YT2_ S01_ P45 YT2_ S01_ P46
YT2_ S01_ P47 YT2_ S01_ P48 YT2_ S01_ P49 YT2_ S01_ P50 YT2_ S01_ P51 YT2_ S01_ P52 YT2_ S01_ P53 YT2_ S01_ P54 YT2_ S01_ P55 YT2_ S01_ P56 YT2_ S01_ P57 YT2_ S01_ P58 YT2_ S01_ P59 YT2_ S01_ P60 YT2_ S01_ P61 YT2_ S01_ P62 YT2_ S01_ P63 YT2_ S01_ P64 YT2_ S01_ P65
YT2_ S01_ P66 YT2_ S01_ P67 YT2_ S01_ P68 YT2_ S01_ P69
LON Profile Name
nvoYTS01p027 nvoYTS01p028 nvoYTS01p029
nvoYTS01p030
nvoYTS01p031 nvoYTS01p032 nvoYTS01p033 nvoYTS01p034 nvoYTS01p035 nvoYTS01p036 nvoYTS01p037 nvoYTS01p038 nvoYTS01p039 nvoYTS01p040 nvoYTS01p041
nvoYTS01p042
nvoYTS01p043
nvoYTS01p044 nvoYTS01p045
nvoYTS01p046
nvoYTS01p047 nvoYTS01p048 nvoYTS01p049 nvoYTS01p050 nvoYTS01p051 nvoYTS01p052 nvoYTS01p053 nvoYTS01p054 nvoYTS01p055 nvoYTS01p056 nvoYTS01p057 nvoYTS01p058 nvoYTS01p059 nvoYTS01p060 nvoYTS01p061 nvoYTS01p062 nvoYTS01p063 nvoYTS01p064
nvoYTS01p065
nvoYTS01p066 nvoYTS01p067 nvoYTS01p068 nvoYTS01p069
LON SNVT Type
SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51)
SNVT_count_f (51)
SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95)
SNVT_switch (95)
SNVT_switch (95)
SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95)
SNVT_switch (95)
SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51)
SNVT_count_f (51)
SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51)
N2 Metasys
ADF 21 ADF 22 ADF 23
ADF 24 ADF 25 ADF 26 ADF 27 ADF 28 ADF 29
BD 5 BD 6 BD 7 BD 8 BD 9 BD 10
BD 11
BD 12 BD 13 BD 14
BD 15 BD 16 BD 17 BD 18 BD 19 BD 20 BD 21 BD 22 BD 23 BD 24 ADI 1 ADI 2 ADI 3 ADI 4 ADI 5 ADI 6 ADI 7 ADI 8 ADI 9
ADI 10 ADF 30 ADF 31 ADF 32 ADF 33
Modbus
Address 0025 0026 0027
Scale x1 x10 x10
0028
x10
0029
x10
0030
x10
0031
x1
0032
x10
0033
x1
0065
N/A
0066
N/A
0067
N/A
0068
N/A
0069
N/A
0070
N/A
0071
N/A
0072
N/A
0073
N/A
0074
N/A
0075
N/A
0076
N/A
0077
N/A
0078
N/A
0079
N/A
0080
N/A
0081
N/A
0082
N/A
0083
N/A
0084
N/A
0030
x1
0031
x1
0032
x1
0033
x1
0034
x1
0035
x1
0036
x1
0037
x1
0038
0039
x1
0040
x1
0041
x10
0042
x10
0043
x10
Engineering Units
Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Imperial SI
Point List Description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
None None Sys 2 Run Time in seconds
SSSS
PSI BAR Sys 2 Suction Pressure
SSSS
PSI BAR Sys 2 Discharge Pressure
SSSS
°F
°C
Sys 2 Suction Temperature (Cond Unit) Sys 2 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temp (R-407c)
OOOO
°F
°C Sys 2 Defrost Temperature (HP)
OOOO
°F (diff) °C (diff) Sys 2 Suction Superheat (EEV)
OOOO
None None Sys 2 Anti-Recycle Timer in seconds
SSSS
%
% Sys 2 EEV Output % (EEV)
OOOO
None None Number of Compressors
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Sys 1 Alarm [0=No Alarm, 1=Alarm]
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Sys 2 Alarm [0=No Alarm, 1=Alarm]
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Evaporator Heater Status
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Evaporator Pump Status
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Sys 1 Comp 1 Run
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Sys 2 Comp 1 Run
SSSS
0/1
0/1
Sys 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve Sys 1 Mode Solenoid Valve (HP)
SSSS
Sys 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
0/1
0/1 Bivalent Heat Source (YLAE HP)
SSSS
Tray Heater (YLPA HP)
0/1
0/1 Sys 1 Comp 2 Run
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Sys 2 Comp 2 Run
SSSS
0/1
0/1
Sys 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve Sys 2 Mode Solenoid Valve (HP)
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Lead System [0=Sys1, 1=Sys2]
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Sys 1 Comp 3 Run
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Sys 2 Comp 3 Run
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Chilled Liquid Type [0=Water, 1=Glycol]
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Ambient Control Mode [0=Std Amb, 1=Low Amb] S S S S
0/1
0/1 Local/Remote Control Mode [0=Local, 1=Remote] S S S S
0/1
0/1 Units [0=Imperial, 1=SI]
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Lead/Lag Control Mode [0=Manual, 1=Auto]
SSSS
0/1
0/1 Sys 2 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
OOOO
None None Sys 1 Operational Code
SSSS
None None Sys 1 Fault Code
SSSS
None None Sys 2 Operational Code
SSSS
None None Sys 2 Fault Code
SSSS
None None Sys 1 Debug Code
NNNN
None None Sys 1 Condenser Fan Stage
SSSS
None None Sys 2 Debug Code
NNNN
None None Sys 2 Condenser Fan Stage
SSSS
NNNN
None
None
Unit Control Mode [0=LW, 1=RW, 2=DA, 3=SP, 4=CL, 5=HT]
SSSS
None None Anti-Recycle Time Programmed
SSSS
°F
°C Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Cutout
SSSS
°F
°C Low Ambient Temp Cutout
SSSS
PSI BAR Low Suction Pressure Cutout Heating (HP)
SSSS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
JOHNSON CONTROLS
Scroll BAS(ISN)
Johnson Controls, Inc. Subject to change without notice.
2 of 6
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
TABLE 31 - YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP (CONT'D)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
04/17/2018
Eng Page Ref P70 P71 P72 P73
P74
P75
P76 P77 P78 P79 P80 P81 P82 P83 P84
BACnet Object Typ/Ins
BACnet Object Name
AV34 YT2_ S01_ P70
AV35 YT2_ S01_ P71
AV36 YT2_ S01_ P72
AV37 YT2_ S01_ P73
AV38 YT2_ S01_ P74
AV39 YT2_ S01_ P75
AV40 AV41 AV42 AV43 BV25 BV26 BV27 BV28 BV29
YT2_ S01_ P76 YT2_ S01_ P77 YT2_ S01_ P78 YT2_ S01_ P79 YT2_ S01_ P80 YT2_ S01_ P81 YT2_ S01_ P82 YT2_ S01_ P83 YT2_ S01_ P84
LON Profile Name
nvoYTS01p070 nvoYTS01p071 nvoYTS01p072 nvoYTS01p073
nvoYTS01p074
nvoYTS01p075
nvoYTS01p076 nvoYTS01p077 nvoYTS01p078 nvoYTS01p079 nvoYTS01p080 nvoYTS01p081 nvoYTS01p082 nvoYTS01p083 nvoYTS01p084
LON SNVT Type
SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51)
SNVT_count_f (51)
SNVT_count_f (51)
SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95)
N2 Metasys
ADF 34 ADF 35 ADF 36 ADF 37
ADF 38
ADF 39 ADF 40 ADF 41 ADF 42 ADF 43 BD 25 BD 26 BD 27 BD 28 BD 29
Modbus
Address 0044 0045 0046 0047
Scale x10 x10 x10 x10
0048
x10
0049
x10
0050
x10
0051
x10
0052
x10
0053
x10
0085
0086
0087
0088
0089
N/A
Engineering Units
Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Imperial SI
Point List Description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PSI BAR Low Suction Pressure Cutout Cooling
SSSS
PSI BAR High Discharge Pressure Cutout
SSSS
°F
°C Remote Setpoint
SSSS
°F
°C Cooling Range
SSSS
PSI °F
BAR Remote Setpoint 2 (SP) °C Remote Heating Setpoint (HP and YCWL HP)
OOOO
PSI BAR Cooling Range 2 (SP)
°F
°C Heating Range (HP and YCWL HP)
OOOO
°F
°C Sys 1 Discharge Temperature (EEV)
OOOO
°F (diff) °C (diff) Sys 1 Discharge Superheat (EEV)
OOOO
°F
°C Sys 2 Discharge Temperature (EEV)
OOOO
°F (diff) °C (diff) Sys 2 Discharge Superheat (EEV)
OOOO
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
0/1
0/1 SCC Auto Detect Available
NSSS
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
10
157
Scroll BAS(ISN)
Johnson Controls, Inc. Subject to change without notice.
3 of 6
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
TABLE 31 - YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP (CONT'D)
158
04/17/2018
SECTION 2
Eng Page Ref
P03 P04 P05 P06 P07 P08 P09 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 P38 P39 P40 P41 P42 P43 P44 P45 P46 P47
BACnet Object Typ/Ins
BACnet Object Name
AV101 YT2_ S02_ P03
AV102 YT2_ S02_ P04
AV103 YT2_ S02_ P05
AV104 YT2_ S02_ P06
AV105 YT2_ S02_ P07
AV106 YT2_ S02_ P08
AV107 YT2_ S02_ P09
AV108 YT2_ S02_ P10
AV109 YT2_ S02_ P11
AV110 YT2_ S02_ P12
AV111 YT2_ S02_ P13
AV112 YT2_ S02_ P14
AV113 YT2_ S02_ P15
AV114 YT2_ S02_ P16
AV115 YT2_ S02_ P17
AV116 YT2_ S02_ P18
AV117 YT2_ S02_ P19
AV118 YT2_ S02_ P20
AV119 YT2_ S02_ P21
AV120 YT2_ S02_ P22
AV121 YT2_ S02_ P23
AV122 YT2_ S02_ P24
AV123 YT2_ S02_ P25
AV124 YT2_ S02_ P26
AV125 YT2_ S02_ P27
AV126 YT2_ S02_ P28
AV127 YT2_ S02_ P29
AV128 YT2_ S02_ P30
AV129 YT2_ S02_ P31
AV130 YT2_ S02_ P32
AV131 YT2_ S02_ P33
AV132 YT2_ S02_ P34
AV133 YT2_ S02_ P35
BV105 YT2_ S02_ P36
BV106 YT2_ S02_ P37
BV107 YT2_ S02_ P38
BV108 YT2_ S02_ P39
BV109 YT2_ S02_ P40
BV110 YT2_ S02_ P41
BV111 YT2_ S02_ P42
BV112 YT2_ S02_ P43
BV113 YT2_ S02_ P44
BV114 YT2_ S02_ P45
BV115 YT2_ S02_ P46
BV116 YT2_ S02_ P47
LON Profile Name
nviYTS02p003 nviYTS02p004 nviYTS02p005 nviYTS02p006 nviYTS02p007 nviYTS02p008 nviYTS02p009 nviYTS02p010 nvoYTS02p011 nvoYTS02p012 nvoYTS02p013 nvoYTS02p014 nvoYTS02p015 nvoYTS02p016 nvoYTS02p017 nvoYTS02p018 nvoYTS02p019 nvoYTS02p020 nvoYTS02p021 nvoYTS02p022 nvoYTS02p023 nvoYTS02p024 nvoYTS02p025 nvoYTS02p026 nvoYTS02p027 nvoYTS02p028 nvoYTS02p029 nvoYTS02p030 nvoYTS02p031 nvoYTS02p032 nvoYTS02p033 nvoYTS02p034 nvoYTS02p035 nvoYTS02p036 nvoYTS02p037 nvoYTS02p038 nvoYTS02p039 nvoYTS02p040 nvoYTS02p041 nvoYTS02p042 nvoYTS02p043 nvoYTS02p044 nvoYTS02p045 nvoYTS02p046 nvoYTS02p047
LON SNVT Type
SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95)
N2 Metasys
ADF 44 ADF 45 ADF 46 ADF 47 BD 30 BD 31 BD 32 BD 33 ADF 48 ADF 49 ADF 50 ADF 51 ADF 52 ADF 53 ADF 54 ADF 55 ADF 56 ADF 57 ADF 58 ADF 59 ADF 60 ADF 61 ADF 62 ADF 63 ADF 64 ADF 65 ADF 66 ADF 67 ADF 68 ADF 69 ADF 70 ADF 71 ADF 72 BD 34 BD 35 BD 36 BD 37 BD 38 BD 39 BD 40 BD 41 BD 42 BD 43 BD 44 BD 45
Modbus
Address 0101 0102 0103 0104 0161 0162 0163 0164 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 0165 0166 0167 0168 0169 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 0175 0176
Scale
x1 x1 x1
x1 x1 x1
N/A
N/A
Engineering Units
Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Imperial SI
Point List Description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
None None Sys 1 Comp 1 Run Hours
NSSS
None None Sys 1 Comp 2 Run Hours
NSSS
None None Sys 1 Comp 3 Run Hours
NSSS
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
None None Sys 2 Comp 1 Run Hours
NSSS
None None Sys 2 Comp 2 Run Hours
NSSS
None None Sys 2 Comp 3 Run Hours
NSSS
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
0/1
0/1 Option Indicator [0=Disabled, 1=Enabled]
NSSS
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
0/1
0/1 Expansion Valve Type [0=TXV, 1=EEV]
NSSS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
JOHNSON CONTROLS
Scroll BAS(ISN)
Johnson Controls, Inc. Subject to change without notice.
4 of 6
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
TABLE 31 - YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP (CONT'D)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
04/17/2018
Eng Page Ref P48 P49 P50 P51 P52 P53 P54 P55 P56 P57 P58 P59 P60 P61 P62 P63 P64 P65 P66 P67 P68 P69 P70 P71 P72 P73 P74 P75 P76 P77 P78 P79 P80 P81 P82 P83 P84
BACnet Object Typ/Ins
BACnet Object Name
BV117 YT2_ S02_ P48
BV118 YT2_ S02_ P49
BV119 YT2_ S02_ P50
BV120 YT2_ S02_ P51
BV121 YT2_ S02_ P52
BV122 YT2_ S02_ P53
BV123 YT2_ S02_ P54
BV124 YT2_ S02_ P55
MV101 YT2_ S02_ P56
MV102 YT2_ S02_ P57
MV103 YT2_ S02_ P58
MV104 YT2_ S02_ P59
MV105 YT2_ S02_ P60
MV106 YT2_ S02_ P61
MV107 YT2_ S02_ P62
MV108 YT2_ S02_ P63
MV109 YT2_ S02_ P64
MV110 YT2_ S02_ P65
AV130 YT2_ S02_ P66
AV131 YT2_ S02_ P67
AV132 YT2_ S02_ P68
AV133 YT2_ S02_ P69
AV134 YT2_ S02_ P70
AV135 YT2_ S02_ P71
AV136 YT2_ S02_ P72
AV137 YT2_ S02_ P73
AV138 YT2_ S02_ P74
AV139 YT2_ S02_ P75
AV140 YT2_ S02_ P76
AV141 YT2_ S02_ P77
AV142 YT2_ S02_ P78
AV143 YT2_ S02_ P79
BV125 YT2_ S02_ P80
BV126 YT2_ S02_ P81
BV127 YT2_ S02_ P82
BV128 YT2_ S02_ P83
BV129 YT2_ S02_ P84
LON Profile Name
nvoYTS02p048 nvoYTS02p049 nvoYTS02p050 nvoYTS02p051 nvoYTS02p052 nvoYTS02p053 nvoYTS02p054 nvoYTS02p055 nvoYTS02p056 nvoYTS02p057 nvoYTS02p058 nvoYTS02p059 nvoYTS02p060 nvoYTS02p061 nvoYTS02p062 nvoYTS02p063 nvoYTS02p064 nvoYTS02p065 nvoYTS02p066 nvoYTS02p067 nvoYTS02p068 nvoYTS02p069 nvoYTS02p070 nvoYTS02p071 nvoYTS02p072 nvoYTS02p073 nvoYTS02p074 nvoYTS02p075 nvoYTS02p076 nvoYTS02p077 nvoYTS02p078 nvoYTS02p079 nvoYTS02p080 nvoYTS02p081 nvoYTS02p082 nvoYTS02p083 nvoYTS02p084
LON SNVT Type
SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_count_f (51) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95) SNVT_switch (95)
N2 Metasys
BD 46 BD 47 BD 48 BD 49 BD 50 BD 51 BD 52 BD 53 ADI 25 ADI 26 ADI 27 ADI 28 ADI 29 ADI 30 ADI 31 ADI 32 ADI 33 ADI 34 ADF 73 ADF 74 ADF 75 ADF 76 ADF 77 ADF 78 ADF 79 ADF 80 ADF 81 ADF 82 ADF 83 ADF 84 ADF 85 ADF 86 BD 54 BD 55 BD 56 BD 57 BD 58
Modbus
Address 0177 0178 0179 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 0150 0151 0152 0153 0185 0186 0187 0188 0189
Scale N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A x1
N/A
Engineering Units
Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Imperial SI
Point List Description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0/1
0/1 YCWL Mode [0=Chiller, 1=Heatpump]
NOOO
NNNN
0/1
0/1 SCC Auto Detect Digit 1
NSSS
0/1
0/1 SCC Auto Detect Digit 2
NSSS
0/1
0/1 SCC Auto Detect Digit 3
NSSS
0/1
0/1 SCC Auto Detect Digit 4
NSSS
0/1
0/1 SCC Auto Detect Digit 5
NSSS
0/1
0/1 SCC Auto Detect Digit 6
NSSS
None None Refrigerant [0=R-22, 1=R-407c, 2=R-410a]
NSSS
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
0/1
0/1 Units [0=Imperial, 1=Metric]
NSSS
NOTES
1 LON SNVTs used: SNVT_count_f (51) and SNVT_switch (95). Must use LON eLink. Modbus scaling factors indicated in bold with an asterisk (*) are user configurable by a field technician, if necessary. All Modbus values are of the type SIGNED with the exception of the user configurable
2 values that are all UNSIGNED. Modbus function types supported: ENG P03-P06 = Types 03, 06, 16; ENG P07-P10 = 01, 03, 05, 06, 15, 16; ENG P36-P55 & P80-84 = 01, 02, 03
3 BACnet engineering units shown with an Asterisk (*) will be assigned a BACnet engineering unit type of 95 - No Units.
4
Status codes: Special display characters such as ( ) [ ] { } / \ % < > are not compatible with eLink N2 formats. Substitute text strings "-", PCT, GTN will be used. String lengths are limited to 60 total characters, including spaces.
5
6
7
8
9
10
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
10
159
Scroll BAS(ISN)
Johnson Controls, Inc. Subject to change without notice.
5 of 6
JOHNSON CONTROLS
160
Code Value
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Operational Code
No Abnormal Condition Unit Switch Off System Switch Off Lockout Unit Fault System Fault Remote Shutdown Daily Schedule Shutdown No Run Permissive No Cool Load Anti-Coincidence Timer Active Anti-Recycle Timer Active Manual Override Suction Limiting Discharge Limiting
Load Limiting Compressor(s) Running Heatpump Load Limiting
Scroll BAS(ISN)
Code Value
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
No Fault Code
Fault/Inhibit Code
Low Ambient Temperature
Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp High Discharge Pressure
Low Suction Pressure
MP/HPCO Fault Low Evaporator Temperature
Unit Motor Current Low Superheat Sensor Fault Discharge Inhibit MP/HPCO Inhibit Pump Trip Pump Fail Make Flow High Ambient Temperature Anti-Vacuum Low Pressure Cutout
Johnson Controls, Inc. Subject to change without notice.
04/17/2018
6 of 6
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
TABLE 31 - YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP (CONT'D)
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION CHART
Temperature Conversion Chart Actual Temperatures
° F
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92 96 100 104 108 112 116 120 124 128 132 136 140 144 148 152 156 160 164 168 172 176 180 184 188 192 196 200 204 208 212 216 220 224 228 232 236 240 244
=
° C
-17.8
-15.6
-13.3
-11.1
-8.9
-6.7
-4.4
-2.2
0.0
2.2
4.4
6.7
8.9
11.1
13.3
15.6
17.8
20.0
22.2
24.4
26.7
28.9
31.1
33.3
35.6
37.8
40.0
42.2
44.4
46.7
48.9
51.1
53.3
55.6
57.8
60.0
62.2
64.4
66.7
68.9
71.1
73.3
75.6
77.8
80.0
82.2
84.4
86.7
88.9
91.1
93.3
95.6
97.8
100.0
102.2
104.4
106.7
108.9
111.1
113.3
115.6
117.8
°C =
-18 -16 -14 -12 -10
-8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 90 92 94 96 98 100 102 104
°F
-0.4 3.2 6.8 10.4 14 17.6 21.2 24.8 28.4 32 35.6 39.2 42.8 46.4 50 53.6 57.2 60.8 64.4 68 71.6 75.2 78.8 82.4 86 89.6 93.2 96.8 100.4 104 107.6 111.2 114.8 118.4 122 125.6 129.2 132.8 136.4 140 143.6 147.2 150.8 154.4 158 161.6 165.2 168.8 172.4 176 179.6 183.2 186.8 190.4 194 197.6 201.2 204.8 208.4 212 215.6 219.2
Temperature Conversion Chart Differential Temperatures
°F = 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60
° C 0
2.2 4.4 6.7 8.9 11.1 13.3 15.6 17.8 20 22.2 24.4 26.7 28.9 31.1 33.3
°C =
°F
0
0
2
3.6
4
7.2
6
10.8
8
14.4
10
18
12
21.6
14
25.2
16
28.8
18
32.4
20
36
22
39.6
24
43.2
26
46.8
28
50.4
30
54
Pressure Conversion Chart Gauge or Differential
PSI
=
BAR
20
1.38
30
2.07
40
2.76
50
3.45
60
4.14
70
4.83
80
5.52
90
6.21
100
6.9
110
7.59
120
8.28
130
8.97
140
9.66
150
10.34
160
11.03
170
11.72
180
12.41
190
13.1
200
13.79
210
14.48
220
15.17
230
15.86
240
16.55
250
17.24
260
17.93
270
18.62
280
19.31
290
20
300
20.69
310
21.38
320
22.07
330
22.76
340
23.45
350
24.14
360
24.83
370
25.52
380
26.21
390
26.9
400
27.59
BAR = 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7 7.5 8 8.5 9 9.5 10 10.5 11 11.5 12 12.5 13 13.5 14 14.5 15 15.5 16 16.5 17 17.5 18 18.5 19 19.5 20 20.5
PSI 21.8 29 36.3 43.5 50.8 58 65.3 72.5 79.8 87 94.3 101.5 108.8 116 123.3 130.5 137.8 145 152.3 159.5 166.8 174 181.3 188.5 195.8 203 210.3 217.5 224.8 232 239.3 246.5 253.8 261 268.3 275.5 282.8 290 297.3
10
JOHNSON CONTROLS
161
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
R-410A PRESSURE TEMPERATURE CHART
PSIG 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76
TEMP °F -60 -58 -54 -50 -46 -42 -39 -36 -33 -30 -28 -26 -24 -20 -18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -3 -2 0 1 3 4 6 7 8 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 19
PSIG 78 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 225 235 245 255 265 275 285 295 305 325 355 375 405 500 600 700
TEMP °F 20 21 24 26 29 32 34 36 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 57 60 64 67 70 73 76 78 80 83 85 88 90 92 95 97 101 108 112 118 134 149 159
162
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.27-NM1 ISSUE DATE: 11/01/2019
The following factors can be used to convert from English to the most common SI Metric values.
SECTION 10 MAINTENANCE
Table 32 - SI METRIC CONVERSION
MEASUREMENT Capacity Power Flow Rate
Length
Weight Velocity
Pressure Drop
MULTIPLY ENGLISH UNIT Tons Refrigerant Effect (ton)
Horsepower Gallons / Minute (gpm)
Feet (ft) Inches (in) Pounds (lb) Feet / Second (fps) Feet of Water (ft) Pounds / Square Inch (psi)
TEMPERATURE To convert degrees Fahrenheit (°F) to degrees Celsius (°C), subtract 32° and multiply by 5/9 or 0.5556.
Example: (45.0°F - 32°) x 0.5556 = 7.22°C
To convert a temperature range (i.e., a range of 10°F) from Fahrenheit to Celsius, multiply by 5/9 or 0.5556.
Example: 10.0°F range x 0.5556 = 5.6 °C range
BY FACTOR 3.516 0.7457 0.0631 0.3048 25.4 0.4536 0.3048 2.989 6.895
TO OBTAIN METRIC UNIT Kilowatts (kW) Kilowatts (kW)
Liters / Second (l/s) Meters (m)
Millimeters (mm) Kilograms (kg) Meters / Second (m/s) Kilopascals (kPa) Kilopascals (kPa)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
163
5000 Renaissance Drive, New Freedom, Pennsylvania USA 17349 Copyright © by Johnson Controls 2019
Form 150.27-NM1 (1119) Issue Date: November 1, 2019 Supersedes: 150.27-NM1 (1115)
1-800-524-1330 www.johnsoncontrols.com
Subject to change without notice. Printed in USA ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Adobe PDF Library 15.0 Adobe InDesign CC 13.1 (Windows)